diff options
| author | Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net> | 2018-12-10 09:22:24 +0200 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net> | 2018-12-10 09:22:24 +0200 |
| commit | b1310f720759447ba8cf40f29465f76046c099c3 (patch) | |
| tree | cf007a37cafcd073a363cc2161c06f798cba742b | |
| parent | 9ab5701fa9731398d7ea5348494b7e2cafcd0fcb (diff) | |
| download | tools-b1310f720759447ba8cf40f29465f76046c099c3.tar tools-b1310f720759447ba8cf40f29465f76046c099c3.tar.gz tools-b1310f720759447ba8cf40f29465f76046c099c3.tar.bz2 tools-b1310f720759447ba8cf40f29465f76046c099c3.tar.xz tools-b1310f720759447ba8cf40f29465f76046c099c3.zip | |
Add Chinese (Traditional) translation
125 files changed, 25183 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/zh_TW.po b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/zh_TW.po new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5ba3b000 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/zh_TW.po @@ -0,0 +1,599 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE +# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Boot ISO Help package. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2017 +# yanicat <evenault@gmail.com>, 2017 +# Amy Xi <fyou1535@gmail.com>, 2017 +# You-Cheng Hsieh <yochenhsieh@gmail.com>, 2017 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Mageia Boot ISO Help 6.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-06-06 19:43+0300\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2017-04-04 18:35+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: You-Cheng Hsieh <yochenhsieh@gmail.com>, 2017\n" +"Language-Team: Chinese (Taiwan) (https://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/" +"teams/9361/zh_TW/)\n" +"Language: zh_TW\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:3 +msgid "Installation with a tiny boot image" +msgstr "使用微小的開機映像檔進行安裝" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:7 +msgid "Summary" +msgstr "摘要" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:9 +msgid "" +"Mageia-<version>-netinstall-<arch>.iso (former known as Boot.iso) is a " +"small image that contains no more than that which is needed to start the " +"drakx installer and find either:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><simpara> +#: en/bootIso.xml:12 +msgid "" +"the <emphasis role=\"bold\">online sources</emphasis> (or the local mirror)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><simpara> +#: en/bootIso.xml:16 +msgid "" +"the ISO image on a local <emphasis role=\"bold\">hard disk</emphasis> or " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">USB stick</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><simpara> +#: en/bootIso.xml:21 +msgid "the ISO image on a <emphasis role=\"bold\">CD/DVD ROM</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><simpara> +#: en/bootIso.xml:25 +msgid "" +"the ISO image on a <emphasis role=\"bold\">lan</emphasis> (local area " +"network)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:29 +msgid "to continue and complete the install." +msgstr "繼續並完成安裝。" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:33 +msgid "Before you start" +msgstr "在您開始之前" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:35 +msgid "" +"The Mageia-<version>-netinstall-nonfree-<arch>.iso (former known as " +"boot-nonfree.iso) contains additional proprietary device drivers, which may " +"be required for your network device, disk controller or, perhaps other " +"device." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><simpara> +#: en/bootIso.xml:40 +msgid "" +"The Mageia-<version>-netinstall-nonfree-<arch>.iso and Mageia-<" +"version>-netinstall-<arch>.iso files can be used to launch a network " +"install over a wired or wifi unencrypted network. (Encrypted wifi or " +"bluetooth not allowed)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:46 +msgid "" +"Unlike when installing from DVD or LiveCD, during the first part of the " +"installation, <emphasis role=\"bold\">Stage 1</emphasis>, you will be asked " +"to type things. During this stage, your keyboard will respond like an <link " +"ns6:href=\"https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout#United_States" +"\">American keyboard</link>. This can be very confusing when you need to " +"type names and paths." +msgstr "" +"與從DVD或LiveCD安裝時不同，在安裝的第一部分<emphasis role=\"bold\">Stage 1</" +"emphasis>中，您將被要求鍵入內容。 在這個階段，您的鍵盤將會以<link ns6:href=" +"\"https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout#United_States\">美式鍵盤</" +"link>的方式回應。 當您需要鍵入名稱和路徑時可能會非常困擾。" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:53 +msgid "" +"You can find the Mageia-<version>-netinstall-nonfree-<arch>.iso and " +"Mageia-<version>-netinstall-<arch>.iso <link ns6:href=\"https://www." +"mageia.org/en/downloads/\">here</link>. It is called Network Installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:57 +msgid "" +"You can also download these images from whatever mirror you want in this " +"list <link ns6:href=\"http://mirrors.mageia.org/\">http://mirrors.mageia.org/" +"</link>. Just follow the path <filename>/distrib//cauldron/$ARCH/install/" +"images/</filename> where $ARCH is i586 or x86_64." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:62 +msgid "" +"After downloading the image, burn it on a CD/DVD or, if you prefer to put it " +"on a USB stick, follow the instructions <link ns6:href=\"https://wiki.mageia." +"org/en/Installation_Media#Dump_Mageia_ISOs_on_an_USB_stick\">here</link>." +msgstr "" +"下載映像檔後，將其燒錄到 CD / DVD 上，或者如果您喜歡將其放在隨身碟上，請按照" +"<link ns6:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/" +"Installation_Media#Dump_Mageia_ISOs_on_an_USB_stick\">此處</link>說明。" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:67 +msgid "Installing" +msgstr "正在安裝" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:69 +msgid "This step is also called Stage 1" +msgstr "這一步也被稱為 Stage 1" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:72 +msgid "" +"Your computer boots in BIOS mode (also called MBR for Master Boot Record)" +msgstr "您的電腦以 BIOS 模式啟動 (也稱為主要開機記錄 MBR)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:75 en/bootIso.xml:89 +msgid "The first screen to appear is this one" +msgstr "首先出現的畫面是這個" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:78 +msgid "../dx-help.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:81 +msgid "" +"When booting up, you can choose to read the advanced help by pressing F2 and " +"return to the installer screen with F1. If you don't choose one, the boot " +"will continue with default settings." +msgstr "" +"當系統啟動時，您可以選擇按 F2 閱讀進階說明，並按 F1 返回到安裝畫面。 如果你都" +"不選擇，開機後會繼續使用預設設定。" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:87 +msgid "Your computer boots in UEFI mode" +msgstr "您的電腦以 UEFI 模式啟動" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:92 +msgid "../dx-welcome2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:95 +msgid "" +"Use the arrow keys to select <guimenuitem>Start Mageia n Install</" +"guimenuitem> and press <guibutton>Enter</guibutton>." +msgstr "" +"使用方向鍵選擇<guimenuitem>Start Mageia n Install</guimenuitem>，然後按" +"<guibutton>Enter</guibutton>鍵。" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:100 +msgid "In both modes" +msgstr "在這兩種模式" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:102 +msgid "Then you can see this screen :" +msgstr "然後您可以看到這樣的畫面：" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:105 +msgid "../Boot-iso01.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:108 +msgid "" +"During Stage 1, nothing will be written to your Hard Disk, so it is safe at " +"any point to quit. You can do so by pressing <guibutton>ctrl+alt+del</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" +"在 Stage 1，沒有任何東西會被寫入您的硬碟，所以在任何時候放棄都是安全的。 您可" +"以按<guibutton>ctrl + ALT + DEL</guibutton>這樣做。" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:111 +msgid "" +"You can use <guibutton>alt+F3</guibutton> to read the logs and <guibutton>alt" +"+F1</guibutton> to return to the installer screen." +msgstr "" +"您可以使用<guibutton>alt + F3</guibutton>來讀取日誌，然後使用<guibutton>alt " +"+ F1</guibutton>返回到安裝畫面。" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:116 +msgid "Choose the installation method" +msgstr "選擇安裝方法" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:118 +msgid "" +"Use the arrow keys to move down and up the list, until your method of choice " +"is highlighted." +msgstr "使用方向鍵向下和向上移動列表，直到您要選擇的方法被標示出來。" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:120 +msgid "" +"If you don't know what to choose for a <emphasis role=\"bold\">Network " +"Installation</emphasis>, choose <guimenu>FTP server</guimenu>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:122 +msgid "" +"On an enterprise network, FTP and rsync may be blocked, so using <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">HTTP server</emphasis> is a good choice in this case." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:125 +msgid "" +"Press the tab key until <guimenuitem>Ok</guimenuitem> is highlighted and " +"then press <guibutton>enter</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:127 +msgid "For an installation from hard disk or USB stick, see below." +msgstr "從硬碟或隨身碟安裝，請參見下圖。" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:130 +msgid "../Boot-iso02.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:136 +msgid "Selecting network connection type" +msgstr "選擇網路連線類型" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:139 +msgid "../Boot-iso03.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:138 +msgid "" +"If you have several network cards, choose the right one. <placeholder type=" +"\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>If you don't know what to choose, choose <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">DHCP</emphasis>" +msgstr "" +"如果您有幾張網卡，請選擇正確的網卡。 <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=" +"\"0\"/>如果你不知道該怎麼選擇，選擇<emphasis role=\"bold\">DHCP</emphasis>" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:142 +msgid "../Boot-iso04.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:148 +msgid "Setting host name and domain name" +msgstr "設定主機名稱和網域" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:150 +msgid "If you don't know what to do: leave it blank and select \"Ok\"" +msgstr "如果您不知道該怎麼辦：將其留空並選擇「確定」" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:153 +msgid "../Boot-iso05.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:159 +msgid "HTTP proxy" +msgstr "HTTP 代理伺服器" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:161 +msgid "Leave blank if you don't know what to do" +msgstr "如果你不知道該怎麼做，留空" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:164 +msgid "../Boot-iso06.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:170 +msgid "Select a medium" +msgstr "選擇媒體" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:174 +msgid "" +"If you choose to specify the mirror manually, you'll have to type the path " +"to your preferred medium. This can be very hard if you don't have an " +"American keyboard." +msgstr "" +"如果您選擇手動指定映像，你必須鍵入路徑到您偏好的媒體。 如果您沒有美式鍵盤，這" +"可能非常困難。" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:179 +msgid "" +"Selecting the \"Mageia\" option will give you a list you can choose from by " +"moving up and down with the arrow keys." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:182 +msgid "../Boot-iso07.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:188 +msgid "Specify the mirror manually" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:189 +msgid "" +"Whichever server you choose, listed <link ns6:href=\"http://mirrors.mageia." +"org/\">here</link>, it should use the same tree-like structure from \"mageia" +"\" (or \"Mageia\") as used by the official Mageia mirrors. That means .../" +"mageia/distrib/<version>/<arch>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:193 +msgid "" +"A correct entry (when using an official mirror) in the \"Mageia directory\" " +"field below, could be:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:195 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">pub/linux/mageia/distrib/cauldron/i586</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:196 +msgid "Another example for Mageia 5 x86_64 would be:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:197 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">pub/Mirrors/Mageia/distrib/5/x86_64</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:198 +msgid "" +"Other mirrors may have a different structure and the screenshots below show " +"such examples:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:200 +msgid "If you chose a HTTP server:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:203 +msgid "../Boot-iso08.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:206 +msgid "If you chose a FTP server:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:209 +msgid "../boot-iso19.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:214 +msgid "Mageia n (selecting a mirror from the list)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:215 +msgid "" +"If you get a lot of missing dependency errors later in the install, reboot " +"and try a different mirror." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:216 +msgid "" +"After choosing an FTP server, you get a screen where you can add a login " +"name and password if required." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:217 +msgid "" +"After this step, <emphasis role=\"bold\">Stage 2</emphasis> will be " +"installed and started" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:218 +msgid "../boot-iso8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:218 +msgid "../boot-iso9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:218 +msgid "../boot-iso10.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:218 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/><placeholder type=\"mediaobject" +"\" id=\"1\"/><placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"2\"/>This is the first " +"Stage 2 screen, see Installing - Stage 2 below:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:222 +msgid "../boot-iso11.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:229 +msgid "Installation from Hard disk" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:233 +msgid "../boot-iso12.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:236 +msgid "" +"If you choose to install from hard disk or USB stick, you must know where " +"the iso file is saved. First, select your hard drive (or USB stick)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:241 +msgid "../boot-iso16.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:244 +msgid "and then the partition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:247 +msgid "../bootimg8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:250 +msgid "" +"Then specify the directory or the file name of the iso. Leaving open or " +"using the directory is easier, because the installer then offers you a list " +"of directories and files, from which you can select with up and down arrows, " +"as seen by the second image." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:256 +msgid "../Bootimg9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/bootIso.xml:261 +msgid "../Bootimg10.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootIso.xml:268 +msgid "<jobtitle>Installing - Stage 2 </jobtitle>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:272 +msgid "" +"The first screen you see now, is the \"Please choose a language to use\" " +"screen. Nothing has been written to your HD yet. If you want to reboot, go " +"to tty2 with ctrl+alt+F2 and press ctrl+alt+del. (ctrl+alt+F7 to come back " +"if you change your mind)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootIso.xml:278 +msgid "" +"This part of the install is the same as shown in <link ns6:href=\"http://doc." +"mageia.org/installer/5/en/content/selectLanguage.html\">http://doc.mageia." +"org/installer/5/en/content/selectLanguage.html</link>. Please click the " +"link to continue reading and change the \"5\" in the URL to the version you " +"are installing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <article> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:9 en/NetInstall.xml:1 +msgid "en" +msgstr "zh_TW" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:12 en/NetInstall.xml:3 +msgid "Installation with tiny image" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><para> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:14 +msgid "The tool to install Mageia with remote repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <book><info><cover><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:17 +msgid "../mageia-2013.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:21 en/NetInstall.xml:12 +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:24 en/NetInstall.xml:16 +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:26 en/NetInstall.xml:18 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:" +"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</" +"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para> +#: en/NetInstall.xml:7 +msgid "" +"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which " +"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make " +"while installing." +msgstr "" diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/zh_TW/NetInstall-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/zh_TW/NetInstall-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..05b9d9d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/zh_TW/NetInstall-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="NetInstall"> + + <info> + <title>Installation with tiny image</title> + <cover> + <para role="tagline">The tool to install Mageia with remote repositories</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../mageia-2013.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>. + </para> + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>. + </para> + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + <article> + +<xi:include href="bootIso.xml"></xi:include> + +</article> +</book> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/zh_TW/NetInstall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/zh_TW/NetInstall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2bc497a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/zh_TW/NetInstall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="Quick-Startup"> + <!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/> + --> +<info> + <title>Installation with tiny image</title> + + <cover> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + + + <xi:include href="bootIso.xml"/> + +</article> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/zh_TW/bootIso.xml b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/zh_TW/bootIso.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c444dbd6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/zh_TW/bootIso.xml @@ -0,0 +1,273 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="SOME_UNIQUE_ID"> + <info> + <title xml:id="bootIso-ti1">使用微小的開機映像檔進行安裝</title> + </info> + <section> + <info> + <title xml:id="bootIso-ti2">摘要</title> + </info> + <para>Mageia-<version>-netinstall-<arch>.iso (former known as Boot.iso) is a +small image that contains no more than that which is needed to start the +drakx installer and find either: </para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <simpara>the <emphasis role="bold">online sources</emphasis> (or the local mirror)</simpara> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <simpara>the ISO image on a local <emphasis role="bold">hard disk</emphasis> or +<emphasis role="bold">USB stick</emphasis></simpara> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <simpara>the ISO image on a <emphasis role="bold">CD/DVD ROM</emphasis></simpara> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <simpara>the ISO image on a <emphasis role="bold">lan</emphasis> (local area network)</simpara> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <para>繼續並完成安裝。</para> + </section> + <section> + <info> + <title xml:id="bootIso-ti12">在您開始之前</title> + </info> + <para>The Mageia-<version>-netinstall-nonfree-<arch>.iso (former known as +boot-nonfree.iso) contains additional proprietary device drivers, which may +be required for your network device, disk controller or, perhaps other +device.</para> + <note> + <simpara>The Mageia-<version>-netinstall-nonfree-<arch>.iso and +Mageia-<version>-netinstall-<arch>.iso files can be used to launch a +network install over a wired or wifi unencrypted network. (Encrypted wifi +or bluetooth not allowed)</simpara> + </note> + <warning> + <para>與從DVD或LiveCD安裝時不同，在安裝的第一部分<emphasis role="bold">Stage +1</emphasis>中，您將被要求鍵入內容。 在這個階段，您的鍵盤將會以<link +ns6:href="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout#United_States">美式鍵盤</link>的方式回應。 +當您需要鍵入名稱和路徑時可能會非常困擾。</para> + </warning> + <para>You can find the Mageia-<version>-netinstall-nonfree-<arch>.iso and +Mageia-<version>-netinstall-<arch>.iso <link +ns6:href="https://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/">here</link>. It is called +Network Installation.</para> + <para>You can also download these images from whatever mirror you want in this +list <link +ns6:href="http://mirrors.mageia.org/">http://mirrors.mageia.org/</link>. +Just follow the +path <filename>/distrib//cauldron/$ARCH/install/images/</filename> where +$ARCH is i586 or x86_64.</para> + <para>下載映像檔後，將其燒錄到 CD / DVD 上，或者如果您喜歡將其放在隨身碟上，請按照<link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Installation_Media#Dump_Mageia_ISOs_on_an_USB_stick">此處</link>說明。</para> + </section> + <section> + <info> + <title xml:id="bootIso-ti3">正在安裝</title> + </info> + <para>這一步也被稱為 Stage 1</para> + <section> + <info> + <title>您的電腦以 BIOS 模式啟動 (也稱為主要開機記錄 MBR)</title> + </info> + <para>首先出現的畫面是這個</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../dx-help.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>當系統啟動時，您可以選擇按 F2 閱讀進階說明，並按 F1 返回到安裝畫面。 如果你都不選擇，開機後會繼續使用預設設定。</para> + </section> + <section> + <info> + <title>您的電腦以 UEFI 模式啟動</title> + </info> + <para>首先出現的畫面是這個</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../dx-welcome2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>使用方向鍵選擇<guimenuitem>Start Mageia n +Install</guimenuitem>，然後按<guibutton>Enter</guibutton>鍵。</para> + </section> + <section> + <info> + <title>在這兩種模式</title> + </info> + <para>然後您可以看到這樣的畫面：</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../Boot-iso01.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>在 Stage 1，沒有任何東西會被寫入您的硬碟，所以在任何時候放棄都是安全的。 您可以按<guibutton>ctrl + ALT + +DEL</guibutton>這樣做。</para> + <para>您可以使用<guibutton>alt + F3</guibutton>來讀取日誌，然後使用<guibutton>alt + +F1</guibutton>返回到安裝畫面。</para> + </section> + <section> + <info> + <title>選擇安裝方法</title> + </info> + <para>使用方向鍵向下和向上移動列表，直到您要選擇的方法被標示出來。</para> + <para>If you don't know what to choose for a <emphasis role="bold">Network +Installation</emphasis>, choose <guimenu>FTP server</guimenu>.</para> + <para>On an enterprise network, FTP and rsync may be blocked, so using <emphasis +role="bold">HTTP server</emphasis> is a good choice in this case.</para> + <para>Press the tab key until <guimenuitem>Ok</guimenuitem> is highlighted and +then press <guibutton>enter</guibutton>.</para> + <para>從硬碟或隨身碟安裝，請參見下圖。</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../Boot-iso02.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + <section> + <info> + <title>選擇網路連線類型</title> + </info> + <para>如果您有幾張網卡，請選擇正確的網卡。 <mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../Boot-iso03.png"/></imageobject></mediaobject>如果你不知道該怎麼選擇，選擇<emphasis role="bold">DHCP</emphasis></para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../Boot-iso04.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + <section> + <info> + <title>設定主機名稱和網域</title> + </info> + <para>如果您不知道該怎麼辦：將其留空並選擇「確定」</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../Boot-iso05.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + <section> + <info> + <title>HTTP 代理伺服器</title> + </info> + <para>如果你不知道該怎麼做，留空</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../Boot-iso06.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + <section> + <info> + <title>選擇媒體</title> + </info> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>如果您選擇手動指定映像，你必須鍵入路徑到您偏好的媒體。 如果您沒有美式鍵盤，這可能非常困難。</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Selecting the "Mageia" option will give you a list you can choose from by +moving up and down with the arrow keys.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../Boot-iso07.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <section> + <title>Specify the mirror manually</title> + <para>Whichever server you choose, listed <link +ns6:href="http://mirrors.mageia.org/">here</link>, it should use the same +tree-like structure from "mageia" (or "Mageia") as used by the official +Mageia mirrors. That means .../mageia/distrib/<version>/<arch></para> + <para>A correct entry (when using an official mirror) in the "Mageia directory" +field below, could be:</para> + <para><emphasis role="bold">pub/linux/mageia/distrib/cauldron/i586</emphasis></para> + <para>Another example for Mageia 5 x86_64 would be:</para> + <para><emphasis role="bold">pub/Mirrors/Mageia/distrib/5/x86_64</emphasis>.</para> + <para>Other mirrors may have a different structure and the screenshots below show +such examples:</para> + <para>If you chose a HTTP server:</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../Boot-iso08.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>If you chose a FTP server:</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../boot-iso19.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + <section> + <title>Mageia n (selecting a mirror from the list)</title> + <para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>If you get a lot of missing dependency errors later in the install, reboot +and try a different mirror.</para></listitem><listitem><para>After choosing an FTP server, you get a screen where you can add a login +name and password if required.</para></listitem><listitem><para>After this step, <emphasis role="bold">Stage 2</emphasis> will be installed +and started</para></listitem></itemizedlist><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../boot-iso8.png"/></imageobject></mediaobject><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../boot-iso9.png"/></imageobject></mediaobject><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../boot-iso10.png"/></imageobject></mediaobject>This is the first Stage 2 +screen, see Installing - Stage 2 below:</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../boot-iso11.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <info> + <title>Installation from Hard disk</title> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../boot-iso12.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>If you choose to install from hard disk or USB stick, you must know where +the iso file is saved. First, select your hard drive (or USB stick)</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../boot-iso16.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>and then the partition</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../bootimg8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>Then specify the directory or the file name of the iso. Leaving open or +using the directory is easier, because the installer then offers you a list +of directories and files, from which you can select with up and down arrows, +as seen by the second image.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../Bootimg9.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../Bootimg10.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <info> + <title><jobtitle>Installing - Stage 2 </jobtitle></title> + </info> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The first screen you see now, is the "Please choose a language to use" +screen. Nothing has been written to your HD yet. If you want to reboot, go +to tty2 with ctrl+alt+F2 and press ctrl+alt+del. (ctrl+alt+F7 to come back +if you change your mind).</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>This part of the install is the same as shown in <link +ns6:href="http://doc.mageia.org/installer/5/en/content/selectLanguage.html">http://doc.mageia.org/installer/5/en/content/selectLanguage.html</link>. +Please click the link to continue reading and change the "5" in the URL to +the version you are installing.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW.po b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW.po new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8f5e6c54 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW.po @@ -0,0 +1,4111 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE +# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Installer Help package. +# +# Translators: +# Cheng-Chia Tseng <pswo10680@gmail.com>, 2018 +# yanicat <evenault@gmail.com>, 2014-2015 +# You-Cheng Hsieh <yochenhsieh@gmail.com>, 2018 +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-04-19 16:32+0300\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-12-10 05:58+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: You-Cheng Hsieh <yochenhsieh@gmail.com>\n" +"Language-Team: Chinese (Taiwan) (http://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/mageia/" +"language/zh_TW/)\n" +"Language: zh_TW\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:25 +msgid "License and Release Notes" +msgstr "授權與發行記錄" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:29 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=" +"\"acceptLicense-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" align=\"center\" revision=" +"\"4\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=" +"\"live-license.png\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im2\" revision=\"5\" align=" +"\"center\" condition=\"live\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:40 +msgid "License Agreement" +msgstr "授權協議" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:43 +msgid "" +"Before installing <application>Mageia</application>, please read the license " +"terms and conditions carefully." +msgstr "在安裝 <application>Mageia</application>之前，請先仔細閱讀許可證條款" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:46 +msgid "" +"These terms and conditions apply to the entire <application>Mageia</" +"application> distribution and must be accepted before you can continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:50 +msgid "" +"To proceed, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:53 +msgid "" +"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for looking. " +"Clicking <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:63 +msgid "Release Notes" +msgstr "發行記錄" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:70 +msgid "" +"Important information about this release of <application>Mageia</" +"application> can be viewed by clicking on the <guibutton>Release Notes</" +"guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:1 en/DrakLive-cover.xml:2 en/DrakLive.xml:1 +#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:1 en/DrakX.xml:1 en/media_selection.xml:1 +msgid "en" +msgstr "zh_TW" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:3 +msgid "Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media)" +msgstr "" + +#. papoteur 2013-04-13 - created +#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection +#. marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:14 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media." +"png\" xml:id=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1\" align=\"center\" revision=" +"\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:19 +msgid "" +"This screen shows you the list of already recognized repositories. You can " +"add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. " +"The source selection determines which packages will be available during the " +"next steps." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:24 +msgid "For a network source, there are two steps to follow:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:28 +msgid "Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a " +"mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by " +"Mageia, like the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Nonfree</emphasis>, the <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Tainted</emphasis> repositories and the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Updates</emphasis>. With the URL, you can designate a specific repository " +"or your own NFS installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:42 +msgid "" +"If you are updating a 64 bit installation which may contain some 32 bit " +"packages, it is advised to use this screen to add an online mirror by " +"ticking one of the Network protocols here. The 64-bit DVD ISO only contains " +"64-bit and noarch packages, it will not be able to update the 32-bit " +"packages. However, after adding an online mirror, the installer will find " +"the needed 32-bit packages there." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:3 +msgid "User and Superuser Management" +msgstr "" + +#. Lebarhon: 20170210 updated for Mageia 6 (umask) +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/addUser.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"setRootPassword-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format=" +"\"PNG\" fileref=\"live-user1.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:20 +msgid "Set Administrator (root) Password:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:24 +msgid "" +"It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to " +"set a <emphasis role=\"bold\">superuser</emphasis> (administrator) password, " +"usually called the <emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type " +"a password into the top box a shield will change from red to yellow to green " +"depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are " +"using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box " +"underneath, to check that the first entry was not mistyped." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:34 +msgid "" +"All passwords are case sensitive. It is best to use a mixture of letters " +"(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:42 +msgid "Enter a user" +msgstr "輸入一位使用者" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Add a user here. A regular user has fewer privileges than the <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">superuser</emphasis> (root), but enough to use the internet, office " +"applications or play games and anything else the average user might use " +"their computer for." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:52 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Icon</guibutton>: if you click on this button it will change the " +"user's icon." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:57 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Real Name</guilabel>: Insert the user's real name into this text " +"box." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:62 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Enter the user login name or let DrakX use " +"a version of the user's real name. <emphasis role=\"bold\">The login name is " +"case sensitive.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:67 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Password</guilabel>: Type in the user password. There is a shield " +"at the end of the text box that indicates the strength of the password. (See " +"also <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"/>)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:73 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password DrakX will " +"check that you have not mistyped the password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:79 +msgid "" +"Any users you added while installing Mageia, will have a home directory that " +"is both read and write protected (umask=0027)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:82 +msgid "" +"You can add any extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</" +"emphasis> step during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</" +"emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:86 +msgid "The access permissions can also be changed after the install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:93 +msgid "Advanced User Management" +msgstr "進階使用者管理" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:96 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> option allows you to edit further " +"settings for the user you are adding." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:101 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop-down list allows you to change the " +"shell available to any user you added in the previous screen. Options are " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Bash</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"bold\">Dash</" +"emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"bold\">Sh</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:107 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">user ID</emphasis> for any user you added in the previous screen. If you " +"are unsure what the purpose of this is, then leave it blank." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:113 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">group ID</emphasis>. Again, if unsure, leave it blank." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:3 +msgid "Choose the mount points" +msgstr "選取掛載點" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 28 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back +#. removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 +#. barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE" +#. with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) +#. Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes +#. Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans +#. write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it +#. And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) +#. 2012-04-19 Language proofreading done +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=" +"\"chooseMountPoints-im1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints." +"png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"live-chooseMountpoints.png\" align=" +"\"center\" xml:id=\"live-chooseMountPoints-im1\" revision=\"1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:36 +msgid "" +"Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If " +"you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you " +"can change the mount points." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:41 +msgid "" +"If you change anything, make sure you still have a <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\"><literal>/</literal></emphasis> (root) partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:46 +msgid "" +"Every partition is shown to the left as: <emphasis role=\"bold\">Device " +"(capacity, mount point, type).</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:50 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Device</emphasis>, is made up of: <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">hard drive</emphasis>, [<emphasis role=\"bold\">hard drive name</" +"emphasis> (letter)], <emphasis role=\"bold\">partition number</emphasis> " +"(for example, <emphasis role=\"bold\">sda5</emphasis>)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:56 +msgid "" +"If you have several partitions, you can choose various different mount " +"points from the drop down menu, such as <emphasis role=\"bold\">/</" +"emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"bold\"><literal>/home</literal></emphasis> and " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">/var</emphasis>. You can even make your own mount " +"points, for instance <emphasis role=\"bold\"><literal>/video</literal></" +"emphasis> for a partition where you want to store your films, or <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">/Data</emphasis> (or some other name) for your data." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:63 +msgid "" +"For any partitions that you don't need to make use of, you can leave the " +"mount point field blank." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:69 +msgid "" +"If you are not sure what to choose, click <emphasis role=\"bold\">Previous</" +"emphasis> to go back and then tick <guilabel>Custom disk partitioning</" +"guilabel>, where, you can click on a partition to see its type and size." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:74 +msgid "" +"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the partition(s) " +"DrakX suggests, or more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/bestTime.xml:10 +msgid "Clock settings" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/bestTime.xml:14 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-bestTime.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"bestTime-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/bestTime.xml:20 +msgid "" +"In this step, you have to select on which time your internal clock is set, " +"either local time or UTC time." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/bestTime.xml:23 +msgid "In advanced tab, you will find more options about clock settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:1 +msgid "Boot Mageia as Live system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:1 +msgid "Booting the medium" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:1 +msgid "From a disc" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:1 +msgid "" +"You can boot directly from the media you used to burn your image (CD-ROM, " +"DVD-ROM...). You usually just need to insert it in your CD/DVD drive for the " +"bootloader to launch the installation automatically after rebooting the " +"computer. If that does not happen you may need to reconfigure your BIOS or " +"press one key that will offer you to choose the peripheral from which the " +"computer will boot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:6 +msgid "" +"According to which hardware you have, and how it is configured, you get " +"either one or another of the two screens below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:7 +msgid "From a USB device" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:7 +msgid "" +"You can boot from the USB device on which you dumped your image ISO. " +"According to your BIOS settings, the computer boots perhaps directly on the " +"USB device already plugged in a port. If that does not happen you may need " +"to reconfigure your BIOS or press one key that will offer you to choose the " +"peripheral from which the computer will boot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:12 +msgid "In BIOS/CSM/Legacy mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/bootLive.xml:12 +msgid "<imageobject><imagedata fileref=\"../live-bootCSM.png\"/></imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:12 +msgid "First screen while booting in BIOS mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:12 +msgid "In the middle menu, you have the choice between three actions:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:13 +msgid "" +"Boot Mageia: That means Mageia 5 will start from the connected media (CD/DVD " +"or USB stick) without writing anything on the disk, so expect a very slow " +"system. Once the boot is done, you can proceed to the installation on a hard " +"disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:16 +msgid "" +"Install Mageia: This choice will directly install Mageia on a hard disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Boot from hard disk: This choice allows to boot from hard disk, as usual, " +"when no media (CD/DVD or USB stick) is connected. (not working with Mageia " +"5)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:19 +msgid "In the bottom menu, are the Boot Options:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:19 +msgid "" +"F1 - Help. Explain the options \"splash\", \"apm\", \"acpi\" and \"Ide\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:20 +msgid "F2 - Language. Choose the display language of the screens." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:21 +msgid "F3 - Screen resolution. Choose between text, 640x400, 800x600, 1024x728" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:22 +msgid "" +"F4 - CD-Rom. CD-Rom or Other. Normally, the installation is performed from " +"the inserted installation medium. Here, select other sources, like FTP or " +"NFS servers. If the installation is carried out in a network with an SLP " +"server, select one of the installation sources available on the server with " +"this option." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:26 +msgid "" +"F5 - Driver. Yes or No. The system is aware about the presence of an " +"optional disk with a driver update and will require its insertion during " +"installation process." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:28 +msgid "" +"F6 - Kernel options. This is a way to specify options according to your " +"hardware and the drivers to use." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:29 +msgid "In UEFI mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/bootLive.xml:29 +msgid "" +"<imageobject><imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../live-bootUEFI.png\" " +"align=\"center\" xml:id=\"bootUEFI-im1\" revision=\"1\"/></imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:29 +msgid "First screen while booting on UEFI system from disk" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:29 +msgid "" +"You have only the choice to run Mageia in Live mode (first choice) or to " +"process the installation (second choice)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:30 +msgid "" +"If you booted from a USB stick, you get two supplemental lines which are a " +"duplicata of the previous lines suffixed with \"USB\". You have to choose " +"them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:32 +msgid "" +"In each case, the first steps will be the same to choose language, timezone " +"and keyboard, then the processes differ, with <link linkend=\"testing" +"\">additional steps in Live mode</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:3 +msgid "Desktop Selection" +msgstr "桌面環境選擇" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:8 +msgid "" +"Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine-" +"tune your choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:11 +msgid "" +"After the selection step(s), you will see a slide-show during package " +"installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the " +"<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" " +"align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:21 +msgid "" +"Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application> " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Plasma</emphasis> or <application>GNOME</" +"application> desktop environment. Both come with a full set of useful " +"applications and tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you wish to use " +"neither (or even use both), or if you want to modify the default software " +"choices for these desktop environments. The <application>LXDE</application> " +"desktop, for instance, is lighter than the previous two, sporting less eye " +"candy and fewer packages installed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:3 +msgid "Package Group Selection" +msgstr "軟體包群組選擇" + +#. Lebarhon 20170209 Updated SC +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png" +"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:14 +msgid "" +"Packages are arranged into common groups, to make choosing what you need on " +"your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however " +"more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which " +"become visible as the mouse is hovered over them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:21 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Workstation</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:25 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Server</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:29 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphical Environment</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:33 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Individual Package Selection</emphasis>: you can use " +"this option to manually add or remove packages" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:38 +msgid "" +"See <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"/> for instructions on how to do a " +"minimal install (without or with X & IceWM)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:3 +msgid "Choose Individual Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" +"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:14 +msgid "" +"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customize your installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:17 +msgid "" +"After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy icon</" +"guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages (saving " +"to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the same " +"packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install and " +"choosing to load it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureServices.xml:3 +msgid "Configure your Services" +msgstr "" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureServices.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png" +"\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:16 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose which services should start when you boot your system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:19 +msgid "Click on a triangle to expand a group to all the relevant services." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:22 +msgid "The settings DrakX chose are usually good." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:25 +msgid "" +"If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info " +"box below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:28 +msgid "Only change things when you know very well what you are doing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:3 +msgid "Configure your Timezone" +msgstr "" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=" +"\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"configureTimezoneUTC.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> " +"<imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"live-timeZone.png\" condition=\"live\"/> " +"</imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Choose your time-zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the " +"same time-zone." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:24 +msgid "" +"In the next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time " +"or to GMT, also known as UTC." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:29 +msgid "" +"If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they " +"are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:13 +msgid "Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX_card_list-im1\" " +"align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:23 +msgid "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually " +"correctly identify your video device." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:26 +msgid "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know " +"which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:29 en/configureX_monitor.xml:57 +msgid "vendor" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:33 +msgid "then the name of your card" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:37 +msgid "and the type of card" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:41 +msgid "" +"If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in " +"the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Xorg</emphasis> category, which provides more than " +"40 generic and open source video card drivers. If you still can't find a " +"specific driver for your card there is the option of using the <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">vesa</emphasis> driver which provides basic capabilities." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:47 +msgid "" +"Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access " +"to the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Command-line</emphasis> Interface." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:51 +msgid "" +"Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which " +"may only be available in the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Nonfree</emphasis> " +"repository and in some cases only from the card manufacturers' websites." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:56 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis role=\"bold\">Nonfree</emphasis> repository needs to be " +"explicitly enabled to access them. If you didn't enable it previously, you " +"should do this after your first reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:3 +msgid "Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\" " +"fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:15 +msgid "" +"No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) " +"you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are " +"all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window " +"System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for " +"<acronym>KDE</acronym> Plasma, <acronym>GNOME</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</" +"acronym> or any other graphical environment to work well, the following " +"<acronym>X</acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct " +"settings if none are shown, or if you think the details are incorrect." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Graphic card</guibutton></emphasis>: Choose your card " +"from the list if needed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:33 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose " +"<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> if applicable, or choose your monitor from " +"the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list. Choose " +"<guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the horizontal and " +"vertical refresh rates of your monitor." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:41 +msgid "Incorrect refresh rates may damage your monitor" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:47 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: The resolution and " +"color depth of your monitor can be set here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:52 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not " +"always appear during install. If the option is there, and you test your " +"settings, you should be ask whether your settings are correct. If you answer " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">yes</emphasis>, the settings will be kept. If you " +"don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen and be able to " +"reconfigure everything until the test result is satisfactory. If the test " +"option is not available, then make sure your settings are on the safe side." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:63 +msgid "" +"<emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to " +"enable or disable various options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:11 +msgid "Choosing your Monitor" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:14 +msgid "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually " +"correctly identify yours." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Selecting a monitor with different characteristics " +"could damage your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something " +"without knowing what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should " +"consult your monitor documentation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\" " +"fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:31 +msgid "<emphasis>Custom</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:33 +msgid "" +"This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh " +"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the " +"screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are " +"displayed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:38 +msgid "" +"It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor " +"type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you " +"may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and " +"consult your monitor documentation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:44 +msgid "<emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:47 +msgid "" +"This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the " +"monitor database." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:51 +msgid "<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:53 +msgid "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which " +"one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:61 +msgid "the monitor manufacturers name" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:65 +msgid "the monitor description" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:69 +msgid "<emphasis>Generic</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:71 +msgid "" +"selecting this group will list nearly 30 display configurations such as " +"1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is " +"often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">Vesa</emphasis> card driver when your video hardware cannot be " +"determined automatically. Once again it may be wise to be conservative in " +"your selections." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:7 +msgid "Custom disk partitioning with DiskDrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:12 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png" +"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata fileref=\"live-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"If you wish to use encryption on your <emphasis role=\"bold\">/</emphasis> " +"partition you must ensure that you have a separate <emphasis role=\"bold\">/" +"boot</emphasis> partition. The encryption option for the <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">/boot</emphasis> partition must NOT be set, otherwise your system " +"will be unbootable." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:29 +msgid "" +"Modify the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create " +"partitions, change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even " +"view their details before you start." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:34 +msgid "" +"There is a tab at the top for every detected hard disk (or other storage " +"device like a USB key). In the screen-shot above there are two available " +"devices: <emphasis role=\"bold\">sda </emphasis>and <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">sdb</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Take care with the <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> option, use it only if " +"you are sure you want to wipe all partitions on the selected storage device." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:43 +msgid "" +"For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, " +"or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it. " +"<guibutton>Expert mode</guibutton> provides more options such as a label " +"(give a name to) a partition, or to choose a partition type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:49 +msgid "Continue until you have adjusted everything to your satisfaction." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:52 +msgid "Click <guibutton>Done</guibutton> when you're ready." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:56 +msgid "" +"If you are installing Mageia on a UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI System " +"Partition) is present and correctly mounted on /boot/EFI (see below)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:61 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake2.png" +"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-diskdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:60 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:72 +msgid "" +"If you are installing Mageia on a Legacy/GPT system, check that a BIOS boot " +"partition is present and of the correct type" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:76 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:9 +msgid "Partitioning" +msgstr "分割磁區" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:12 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) along with the " +"DrakX partitioning proposals for where to install <application>Mageia</" +"application>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:16 +msgid "" +"The options available from those shown below will vary according to the " +"layout and content of your particular hard drive(s)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:21 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-" +"doPartitionDisks.png\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks.png\" align=" +"\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:32 +msgid "Use Existing Partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:35 +msgid "" +"If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have " +"been found and may be used for the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:41 +msgid "Use Free Space" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:43 +msgid "" +"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for " +"your new Mageia installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:49 +msgid "Use Free Space on a Windows Partition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:52 +msgid "" +"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may " +"offer to use it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:56 +msgid "" +"This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation, " +"but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all " +"important files!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:61 +msgid "" +"Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The " +"partition must be \"clean\", meaning that Windows must have closed down " +"correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, " +"although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been " +"moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to " +"back up your personal files." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:69 +msgid "" +"With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in " +"light blue and the proposed Mageia partition in dark blue with their " +"intended sizes just underneath. You have the option to modify these sizes by " +"clicking and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the following " +"screen-shot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:76 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-" +"doPartitionDisks2.png\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks2.png\" align=" +"\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:87 +msgid "Erase and use Entire Disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:90 +msgid "This option will allocate the entire drive for Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:93 +msgid "Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:96 +msgid "" +"If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already " +"have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use " +"this option." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:103 +msgid "Custom disk partitioning" +msgstr "自訂磁碟分割" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:106 +msgid "" +"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your " +"hard drive(s)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:112 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Partition sizing:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:114 +msgid "" +"If you are not using the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Custom disk partitioning</" +"emphasis> option, the installer will allocate the available space according " +"to the following rules:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:120 +msgid "" +"If the total available space is less than 50 GB, then only one partition is " +"created. This will be the <emphasis role=\"bold\">/</emphasis> (root) " +"partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:125 +msgid "" +"If the total available space is greater than 50 GB, then three partitions " +"are created" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:130 +msgid "" +"6/19 of the total available place is allocated to <emphasis role=\"bold\">/</" +"emphasis> with a maximum of 50 GB" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:134 +msgid "1/19 is allocated to swap with a maximum of 4 GB" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:138 +msgid "" +"the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to <emphasis role=\"bold\">/home.</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:144 +msgid "" +"That means that from 160 GB or greater available space, the installer will " +"create three partitions: 50 GB for <emphasis role=\"bold\">/</emphasis>, 4 " +"GB for <emphasis role=\"bold\">swap</emphasis> and the remainder for " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">/home</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:150 +msgid "" +"If you are using a UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be " +"automatically detected - or created if it does not exist yet, and mounted " +"on /boot/EFI. The <emphasis role=\"bold\">Custom disk partitioning</" +"emphasis> option is the only one that allows to check it has been correctly " +"done" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:158 +msgid "" +"If you are using a Legacy (CSM or BIOS) system with a GPT disk, you need to " +"create a BIOS boot partition if not already existing. It is a roughly 1 MiB " +"partition with no mount point. Choose <xref linkend=\"diskdrake\"/> to be " +"able to create it with the Installer like any other partition, just select " +"BIOS boot partition as the filesystem type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:165 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:175 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks4.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:182 +msgid "" +"Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the " +"previous standard of 512. Due to lack of available hardware, the " +"partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested with such a " +"drive. Also some SSD devices now use an erase block size over 1 MB. If you " +"have such a device we suggest that you partition the drive in advance, using " +"an alternative partitioning tool like <emphasis role=\"bold\">gparted</" +"emphasis>, and to use the following settings:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:189 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Align to</emphasis> = MiB" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:191 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Free space preceding (MiB)</emphasis> = 2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:194 +msgid "" +"Also make sure all partitions are created using an even number of megabytes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:4 en/DrakLive-cover.xml:30 en/DrakLive.xml:3 +msgid "Installation from LIVE medium" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:5 en/DrakX-cover.xml:4 +msgid "<publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><date> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:10 +msgid "January 2015" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><revremark> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:11 +msgid "Mageia 5" +msgstr "Mageia 5" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:15 en/DrakX-cover.xml:14 +msgid "The Official Documentation for Mageia" +msgstr "Mageia的官方文件" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><mediaobject> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:17 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"mageia-2013.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:21 en/DrakLive.xml:12 en/DrakX-cover.xml:20 +#: en/DrakX.xml:12 +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:24 en/DrakLive.xml:15 en/DrakX-cover.xml:23 +#: en/DrakX.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:26 en/DrakLive.xml:17 en/DrakX-cover.xml:25 +#: en/DrakX.xml:17 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:" +"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</" +"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:31 en/DrakLive.xml:6 en/DrakX-cover.xml:36 +#: en/DrakX.xml:6 +msgid "<note>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:32 en/DrakLive.xml:7 en/DrakX-cover.xml:37 +#: en/DrakX.xml:7 +msgid "" +"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which " +"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make " +"while installing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:35 en/DrakLive.xml:10 en/DrakX-cover.xml:40 +#: en/DrakX.xml:10 +msgid "</note>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:3 en/DrakX-cover.xml:35 en/DrakX.xml:3 +msgid "Installation with DrakX" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><date> +#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:9 +msgid "February 2014" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><revremark> +#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:10 +msgid "Mageia 4" +msgstr "Mageia 4" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><mediaobject> +#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../mageia-2013.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:3 +msgid "Congratulations" +msgstr "恭喜" + +#. Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" " +"align=\"center\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:14 +msgid "" +"You have finished installing and configuring <application>Mageia</" +"application> and it is now safe to remove the installation medium and reboot " +"your computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:18 +msgid "" +"After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating " +"systems (if there are more than one) on your computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:22 +msgid "" +"If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install " +"will be automatically selected and started." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:26 +msgid "Enjoy!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:28 +msgid "" +"Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to " +"Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/firewall.xml:3 +msgid "Firewall" +msgstr "防火牆" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:6 +msgid "" +"This section allows you to configure some simple firewall rules: they " +"determine which type of message from the Internet will be accepted by the " +"target system. This, in turn, allows the corresponding services on the " +"system to be accessible from the Internet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:12 +msgid "" +"In the default setting (no button is checked), no service of the system is " +"accessible from the network. The <emphasis role=\"bold\">Everything (no " +"firewall)</emphasis> enables access to all services of the machine - an " +"option that does not make much sense in the context of the installer since " +"it would create a totally unprotected system. Its veritable use is in the " +"context of the Mageia Control Center (which uses the same GUI layout) for " +"temporarily disabling the entire set of firewall rules for testing and " +"debugging purposes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:21 +msgid "" +"All other options are more or less self-explanatory. As an example, you will " +"enable the <emphasis role=\"bold\">CUPS server</emphasis> if you want " +"printers on your machine to be accessible from the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:25 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Advanced</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis role=\"bold\">Advanced</emphasis> option opens a window where " +"you can enable a series of services by typing a list of couples (blank " +"separated)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:31 +msgid "<emphasis><port-number>/<protocol></emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><simplelist><member> +#: en/firewall.xml:34 +msgid "" +"- <emphasis><port-number></emphasis> is the value of the port assigned to " +"the service you want to enable (e.g. 873 for the RSYNC service) as defined " +"in <emphasis>RFC-433</emphasis>;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><simplelist><member> +#: en/firewall.xml:38 +msgid "" +"- <emphasis><protocol></emphasis> is one of <emphasis>TCP</emphasis> or " +"<emphasis>UDP</emphasis> - the internet protocol that is used by the service." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:43 +msgid "" +"For instance, the entry for enabling access to the RSYNC service therefore " +"is <emphasis>873/tcp</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:46 +msgid "" +"In case a service is implemented to use both protocols, you specify 2 " +"couples for the same port." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:3 +msgid "Formatting" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 29 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" xml:id=\"formatPartitions-im1\" align=\"center" +"\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"live-formatPartitions-im1\" align=\"center" +"\" fileref=\"live-formatPartitions.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:24 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on " +"partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be preserved." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:28 +msgid "Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> to choose partitions you want to " +"check for so called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:36 +msgid "" +"If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on " +"<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> " +"and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen, " +"where you can choose to view details of your partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:43 +msgid "" +"When you are confident about the selection, click on <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton> to continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:10 +msgid "DrakX, the Mageia Installer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:13 +msgid "" +"Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia " +"Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as " +"possible." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:17 +msgid "" +"The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will " +"start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:22 +msgid "Installation Welcome Screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:25 +msgid "Using a Mageia DVD" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Here are the default welcome screens when using a Mageia DVD, The first one " +"is what you will see if you have a UEFI system, the second one is for a " +"Legacy system:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:32 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:37 +msgid "" +"From this screen, you have access to options by pressing \"<emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">e</emphasis>\" to enter the edit mode. To come back to this screen, " +"press either <emphasis role=\"bold\">Esc</emphasis> key to quit without " +"saving or press the key <emphasis role=\"bold\">Ctrl</emphasis> or <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">F10</emphasis> to quit with saving." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:45 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:50 +msgid "" +"From this screen, it is possible to set some preferences (note that the " +"options <emphasis role=\"bold\">F1</emphasis> to <emphasis role=\"bold\">F6</" +"emphasis> are available only on Legacy systems):" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:55 +msgid "" +"Within any of the <emphasis role=\"bold\">F2</emphasis> to <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">F6</emphasis> options, you can view relevant help by pressing " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">F1</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:63 +msgid "" +"Press <emphasis role=\"bold\">F2</emphasis> to have the installer use a " +"specific language for the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:67 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome-lang.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:72 +msgid "" +"Use the arrow keys to select the language then press <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Enter</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:77 +msgid "" +"If needed, change the screen resolution by pressing <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">F3</emphasis> (Legacy mode only)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:81 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome5def.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:88 +msgid "" +"If you experience problems with the installation, you could try modifying " +"the default settings using the <emphasis role=\"bold\">F6</emphasis> " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Kernel Options</emphasis> (for UEFI systems press " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">e</emphasis> instead)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:96 +msgid "Default: It doesn't alter anything in the default options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:101 +msgid "" +"Safe Settings: Priority is given to the safer options at the price of a " +"performance detriment." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:106 +msgid "" +"No ACPI: (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface): Power management " +"features are not used." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:113 +msgid "" +"No Local APIC: (Local Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller): CPU " +"interrupt. Select this option if you experience system misbehaviour like a " +"kernel panic in relation to APIC." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:120 +msgid "" +"When you select one of these entries, it modifies the default options " +"displayed in the <guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para> +#: en/installer.xml:125 +msgid "" +"In some Mageia releases, it may happen that the entries selected with " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">F6</emphasis> do not appear in the <guilabel>Boot " +"Options</guilabel> line, despite this, they will in fact be applied." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:132 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome6opt.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:139 +msgid "" +"Pressing <emphasis role=\"bold\">F1</emphasis> opens a help window for " +"various boot options. Select an item with the arrow keys and press <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Enter</emphasis> for more details or press <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">Esc</emphasis> to go back to the welcome screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:146 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcomeHelp1.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:151 +msgid "" +"The detailed view about the splash option. Press <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Esc</emphasis> or select <guilabel>Return to Boot Options</guilabel> to " +"go back to the options list. These options can be added by hand in the " +"<guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:158 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcomeHelp2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para> +#: en/installer.xml:164 +msgid "" +"The help is translated in the chosen language with <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">F2</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:168 +msgid "" +"For more information about kernel options on legacy and UEFI systems, see: " +"<link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_set_up_kernel_options" +"\">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_set_up_kernel_options</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:177 +msgid "The installation steps" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:179 +msgid "" +"The install process is divided into a number of steps, the status of which " +"is indicated in a panel to the left of the screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:182 +msgid "" +"Each step has one or more screens which may also have <guibutton>Advanced</" +"guibutton> sections with extra, less commonly required, options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:186 +msgid "" +"Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons for further details " +"about the particular step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/installer.xml:190 +msgid "" +"If at some points during the install you decide to stop the installation, it " +"is possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a " +"partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your " +"computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well " +"leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure " +"rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys " +"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press " +"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:203 +msgid "Installation Problems and Possible Solutions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:206 +msgid "No Graphical Interface" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:210 +msgid "" +"After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection screen. " +"This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using low " +"resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:217 +msgid "" +"If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be possible. " +"In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use this press " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Esc</emphasis> at the first welcome screen and " +"confirm with <emphasis role=\"bold\">ENTER</emphasis>. You will be presented " +"with a black screen with the word \"boot:\". Type \"text\" and press " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">ENTER</emphasis> to continue with the installation " +"in text mode." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:230 +msgid "The Install Freezes" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:232 +msgid "" +"If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a " +"problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of " +"hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type " +"<code>noauto</code> at the prompt. This option may also be combined with " +"other options as necessary." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:240 +msgid "RAM problem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:242 +msgid "" +"This will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the " +"available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the " +"<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of RAM. e." +"g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:249 +msgid "Dynamic partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:251 +msgid "" +"If you converted your hard disk from <emphasis role=\"bold\">basic</" +"emphasis> format to <emphasis role=\"bold\">dynamic</emphasis> format in " +"Microsoft Windows, then it is not possible to install Mageia on this disc. " +"To revert to a basic disk, see the Microsoft documentation: <link ns2:href=" +"\"http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx\">http://msdn." +"microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:3 +msgid "Updates" +msgstr "更新" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 30 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename +#. marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" " +"align=\"center\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Since this version of <application>Mageia</application> was released, some " +"packages will have been updated or improved." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:24 +msgid "" +"Choose <guilabel>Yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them, " +"select <guilabel>No</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you " +"aren't connected to the Internet" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:29 +msgid "Press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/login.xml:1 +msgid "Login screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/login.xml:1 +msgid "" +"<imageobject><imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"login-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"login.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/></imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/login.xml:1 +msgid "KDM login screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/login.xml:1 +msgid "Finally, you will come to the login screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/login.xml:1 +msgid "" +"Enter your user name and user password, and in a few seconds you will find " +"yourself with a loaded KDE or GNOME desktop, depending on which live medium " +"you used. You can now start using your Mageia installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/login.xml:3 +msgid "" +"You can find another part of our documentation in <link linkend=\"https://" +"wiki.mageia.org/en/Category:Documentation\">the Mageia wiki</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/media_selection.xml:3 +msgid "Media Selection (Nonfree)" +msgstr "" + +#. papoteur 2013-04-11 - created +#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media) +#. marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell +#. marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong) +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/media_selection.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are " +"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories " +"selection determines which packages will be available for selection during " +"the next steps." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains " +"the base of the distribution." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:32 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository includes packages that are free-" +"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source " +"software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes " +"nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers, firmware for various WiFi " +"cards, etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:40 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under " +"a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is " +"that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g. " +"multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed " +"to play commercial video DVD's, etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:3 +msgid "Minimal Install" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:11 +msgid "" +"You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the " +"Package Group Selection screen, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:14 +msgid "" +"If desired, you can additionally tick the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Individual " +"package selection</emphasis> option in the same screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for " +"<application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised " +"workstation. You will probably use this option combined with the <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Individual package selection</emphasis> option mentioned " +"above, to fine-tune your installation, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackagesTree" +"\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:22 +msgid "" +"If you choose this installation method, then the relevant screen will offer " +"you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:26 +msgid "" +"If <emphasis role=\"bold\">With X</emphasis> is chosen, then IceWM (a " +"lightweight desktop environment) will also be included." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:29 +msgid "" +"The basic documentation is provided in the form of man and info pages. It " +"contains the man pages from the <link xlink:href=\"http://www.tldp.org/" +"manpages/man.html\">Linux Documentation Project</link> and the <link xlink:" +"href=\"http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/\">GNU coreutils</link> " +"info pages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:35 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:3 +msgid "Summary of miscellaneous parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6. 20170209 updated SC +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/misc-params.xml:10 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summaryTop.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:15 +msgid "" +"DrakX presents a proposal for the configuration of your system depending on " +"the choices you made and on the hardware detected. You can check the " +"settings here and change them if you want by pressing <guibutton>Configure</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:21 +msgid "" +"As a general rule, it is recommended that you accept the default settings " +"unless:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:24 +msgid "there are known issues with a default setting" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:28 +msgid "the default setting has already been tried and it fails" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:32 +msgid "" +"some other factor mentionned in the detailed sections below is an issue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:40 +msgid "System parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:45 +msgid "<guilabel>Timezone</guilabel>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:47 +msgid "" +"DrakX selects a time zone for you, depending on your preferred language. You " +"can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:53 +msgid "<guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:56 +msgid "" +"If the selected country is wrong, it is very important that you correct the " +"setting. See <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:62 +msgid "<guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:64 +msgid "DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:67 +msgid "Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure GRUB2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:70 +msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:75 +msgid "<guilabel>User management</guilabel>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:78 +msgid "" +"You can add extra users here. They will each get their own <literal>/home</" +"literal> directories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:84 +msgid "<guilabel>Services</guilabel>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:86 +msgid "" +"System services refer to those small programs which run in the background " +"(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain processes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:90 +msgid "" +"You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may " +"prevent your computer from operating correctly." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:94 +msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:101 +msgid "Hardware parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:106 +msgid "<guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:108 +msgid "" +"Configure your keyboard layout according to your location, language and type " +"of keyboard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:113 +msgid "" +"If you notice a wrong keyboard layout and want to change it, keep in mind " +"that your passwords are going to change too." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:119 +msgid "<guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:121 +msgid "" +"Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs " +"etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:126 +msgid "<guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:129 +msgid "" +"The installer uses the default driver - if there is a default one. The " +"option to select a different driver is only given when there is more than " +"one driver for your card, but where none of them is the default one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:137 +msgid "<guilabel>Graphical interface</guilabel>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:140 +msgid "This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:143 +msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/misc-params.xml:149 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:157 +msgid "Network and Internet parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:163 +msgid "<guilabel>Network</guilabel>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:165 +msgid "" +"You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free " +"drivers it is better to do that after reboot, using the <application>Mageia " +"Control Center</application>, if you have not yet enabled the Nonfree media " +"repositories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:172 +msgid "" +"When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to monitor " +"that interface as well." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:179 +msgid "<guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:181 +msgid "" +"A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider " +"internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a " +"proxy service." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:186 +msgid "" +"You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you " +"need to enter here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:195 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "保全" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:200 +msgid "<guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:203 +msgid "" +"Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default " +"setting (Standard) is adequate for general use." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:207 +msgid "Check the option which best suits your usage." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:212 +msgid "<guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:214 +msgid "" +"A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the " +"rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:218 +msgid "" +"Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your " +"selections will depend on what you use your computer for. For more " +"information, see <xref linkend=\"firewall\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:224 +msgid "Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/reboot.xml:3 +msgid "Reboot" +msgstr "重新開機" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/reboot.xml:6 +msgid "" +"Once the bootloader has been installed, you will be prompted to halt your " +"computer, remove the live CD and restart the computer, click on <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\"><guibutton>Finish</guibutton></emphasis> and act as " +"asked<emphasis role=\"bold\"> in this order!</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/reboot.xml:11 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-reboot2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/reboot.xml:15 +msgid "" +"When you restart, you will see a succession of download progress bars. These " +"indicate that the software media lists are being downloaded (see Software " +"management)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/reboot.xml:17 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"reboot-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"reboot.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:16 +msgid "" +"Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> " +"partition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You have more than one <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></" +"application> partition. Choose which one should be made smaller to make " +"space for installing <application>Mageia</application>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:3 +msgid "Security Level" +msgstr "安全層級" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Please choose the desired security level</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Standard</emphasis> is the default, and recommended " +"setting for the average user. The <emphasis role=\"bold\">Secure</emphasis> " +"setting will create a highly protected system - for instance if the system " +"is to be used as a public server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:24 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Security Administrator</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:26 +msgid "" +"This item allows you to configure an email address to which the system will " +"send <emphasis>security alert messages</emphasis> when it detects situations " +"which require notification to a system administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:31 +msgid "" +"A good, and easy-to-implement, choice is to enter <user>@localhost - " +"where <user> is the login name of the user to receive these messages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:36 +msgid "" +"The system sends such messages as <emphasis role=\"bold\">Unix Mailspool " +"messages</emphasis>, not as \"ordinary\" SMTP mail: this user must therefore " +"be configured for receiving such mail!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:41 +msgid "" +"After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings " +"in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> section of the Mageia Control Center." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:6 +msgid "Select and use ISOs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:9 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "前言" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:10 +msgid "" +"Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose " +"which image best suits your needs." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:12 +msgid "There are two families of media:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:15 +msgid "" +"Classical installer: Booting with this media provides you with the maximum " +"flexibility when choosing what to install, and for configuring your system. " +"In particular, you have a choice of which Desktop environment to install" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:21 +msgid "" +"LIVE media: This option allows you to try out Mageia without having to " +"actually install it, or make any changes to your computer. If the " +"installation is decided, the process is simpler, but you get fewer choices " +"than offered by the Classical installer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:27 +msgid "Details are given in the next sections." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:30 +msgid "Media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:32 +msgid "Definition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to " +"install and/or update Mageia and by extension any physical support (DVD, USB " +"stick, ...) the ISO file is copied to." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:36 +msgid "" +"You can find Mageia ISO's <link ns4:href=\"http://www.mageia.org/en/" +"downloads/\">here</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:39 +msgid "Classical installation media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:41 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:71 +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:141 +msgid "Common features" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:44 +msgid "These ISOs use the Classical installer called drakx." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:47 +msgid "" +"They are used for performing clean installs or to upgrade a previously " +"installed version of Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:51 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:83 +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:158 +msgid "Different media for 32 and 64 bit architectures." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:54 +msgid "" +"Some tools are available in the Welcome screen: Rescue System, Memory Test, " +"Hardware Detection Tool." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:58 +msgid "Each DVD contains many available desktop environments and languages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:62 +msgid "" +"You'll be given the choice during the installation to add non free software." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:69 +msgid "Live media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:74 +msgid "" +"Can be used to preview the Mageia operating system without having to install " +"it. Can also be used to install Mageia if you wish." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:79 +msgid "Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (Plasma, GNOME or Xfce)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Live ISOs can only be used to create clean " +"installations, they cannot be used to upgrade previously installed Mageia " +"releases.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:91 +msgid "They contain non free software." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:96 +msgid "Live DVD Plasma" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:99 +msgid "Plasma desktop environment only." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:102 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:116 +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:130 +msgid "All available languages are present." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:105 +msgid "64 bit architecture only." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:110 +msgid "Live DVD GNOME" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:113 +msgid "GNOME desktop environment only." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:119 +msgid "64 bit architecture only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:124 +msgid "Live DVD Xfce" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:127 +msgid "Xfce desktop environment only." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:133 +msgid "32 or 64 bit architectures." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:139 +msgid "Net install media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:144 +msgid "" +"These are minimal ISO's containing no more than that which is needed to " +"start the drakx installer and find drakx-installer-stage2 and other packages " +"that are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be " +"on the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the Internet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:152 +msgid "" +"These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient if " +"bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, or if you have a PC without a " +"DVD drive or is unable to boot from a USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:161 +msgid "First steps are English language only." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:166 +msgid "netinstall.iso" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:169 +msgid "" +"Contains only free software, for those people who prefer not to use non-free " +"software." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:175 +msgid "netinstall-nonfree.iso" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:178 +msgid "" +"Contains non-free software (mostly drivers, codecs...) for people who need " +"it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:186 +msgid "Downloading and Checking Media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:188 +msgid "Downloading" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:189 +msgid "" +"Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or " +"BitTorrent. In both cases, you are provided with some information, such as " +"the mirror in use and an option to switch if the bandwidth is too low. If " +"http is chosen, you will also see something regarding checksums." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:191 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Checking.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:195 +msgid "" +"md5sum and sha1sum are tools to check the ISO integrity. Choose one or the " +"other, and copy the checksum <link linkend=\"integrity\">for later use</" +"link>. Then a window similar to this one appears:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:199 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Download.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:203 +msgid "Select the Save File option, then, click OK." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:206 +msgid "Checking the integrity of the downloaded media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:208 +msgid "" +"The checksums referred to earlier, are digital fingerprints generated by an " +"algorithm from the file to be downloaded. You may compare the checksum of " +"your downloaded ISO against that of the original source ISO. If the " +"checksums do not match, it means that the actual data on the ISO's do not " +"match, and if it is the case, then you should retry the download or attempt " +"a repair using BitTorrent." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:214 +msgid "" +"To generate the checksum for your downloaded ISO, open a console, (no need " +"to be root), and:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:218 +msgid "" +"To use md5sum, type: <userinput>md5sum path/to/the/image/file.iso</" +"userinput>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:222 +msgid "" +"To use sha1sum, type: <userinput>sha1sum path/to/the/image/file.iso</" +"userinput>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:226 +msgid "Example:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:228 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../Md5sum.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:232 +msgid "" +"and compare the result (you may have to wait for a while) with the checksum " +"provided by Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:237 +msgid "Burn or dump the ISO" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:238 +msgid "" +"The verified ISO can now be burned to a CD/DVD or dumped to a USB stick. " +"This is not a standard copy operation as a bootable medium will actually be " +"created." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:242 +msgid "Burning the ISO to a CD/DVD" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:243 +msgid "" +"Whichever software you use, ensure that the option to burn an <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">image</emphasis> is used, burn <emphasis role=\"bold\">data</" +"emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">files</emphasis> is not correct. See " +"<link ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images\">the " +"Mageia wiki</link> for more information." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:248 +msgid "Dump the ISO to a USB stick" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:249 +msgid "" +"All Mageia ISOs are hybrids, which means you can 'dump' them to a USB stick " +"and then use it to boot and install the system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><warning><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:252 +msgid "" +"\"Dumping\" an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system " +"on the device; any existing data will be lost and the partition capacity " +"will be reduced to the image size." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:256 +msgid "" +"To recover the original capacity, you must redo partitioning and re-format " +"the USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:259 +msgid "Using a graphical tool within Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:260 +msgid "" +"You can use a graphical tool like <link ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks\">IsoDumper</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:263 +msgid "Using a graphical tool within Windows" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:264 +msgid "You could try:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:267 +msgid "" +"<link ns4:href=\"http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US\">Rufus</link> using the " +"\"ISO image\" option;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:271 +msgid "" +"<link ns4:href=\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager\">Win32 " +"Disk Imager</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:277 +msgid "Using Command line within a GNU/Linux system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><warning><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:279 +msgid "" +"It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk overwriting " +"potentially valuable existing data if you specify the wrong target device." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:285 +msgid "Open a console" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:288 +msgid "" +"Become a root (Administrator) user with the command <userinput>su -</" +"userinput> (don't forget the final '-' )" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:291 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../Root.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:297 +msgid "" +"Plug in your USB stick (do not mount it, this also means do not open any " +"application or file manager that could access or read it)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:302 +msgid "Enter the command <userinput>fdisk -l</userinput>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:304 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../Fdisk.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:310 +msgid "" +"Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example <code>/" +"dev/sdb</code> in the screenshot above, it is an 8GB USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:312 +msgid "" +"Alternatively, you can find the device name with the command <code>dmesg</" +"code>: towards the end of this example, you can see the device name starting " +"with <emphasis>sd</emphasis>, and in this case, <emphasis>sdd</emphasis> is " +"the actual device. You can also see that its size is 2GB:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><screen> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:317 +#, no-wrap +msgid "" +"[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd\n" +"[72594.770528] usb 1-1: New USB device found, idVendor=8564, idProduct=1000\n" +"[72594.770533] usb 1-1: New USB device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3\n" +"[72594.770536] usb 1-1: Product: Mass Storage Device\n" +"[72594.770537] usb 1-1: Manufacturer: JetFlash\n" +"[72594.770539] usb 1-1: SerialNumber: 18MJTWLMPUCC3SSB\n" +"[72594.770713] usb 1-1: ep 0x81 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes\n" +"[72594.770719] usb 1-1: ep 0x2 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes\n" +"[72594.771122] usb-storage 1-1:1.0: USB Mass Storage device detected\n" +"[72594.772447] scsi host8: usb-storage 1-1:1.0\n" +"[72595.963238] scsi 8:0:0:0: Direct-Access JetFlash Transcend 2GB 1100 PQ: 0 ANSI: 4\n" +"[72595.963626] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] 4194304 512-byte logical blocks: (2.14 GB/2.00 GiB)\n" +"[72595.964104] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Write Protect is off\n" +"[72595.964108] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Mode Sense: 43 00 00 00\n" +"[72595.965025] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] No Caching mode page found\n" +"[72595.965031] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Assuming drive cache: write through\n" +"[72595.967251] <emphasis>sdd</emphasis>: sdd1\n" +"[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:317 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"screen\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:337 +msgid "" +"Enter the command: <emphasis role=\"bold\"># <userinput>dd if=path/to/the/" +"ISO/file of=/dev/sdX bs=1M</userinput></emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:340 +msgid "Where X=your device name eg: /dev/sdd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:341 +msgid "" +"Example:<emphasis role=\"bold\"> # <userinput>dd if=/home/user/Downloads/" +"Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso of=/dev/sdd bs=1M</userinput></emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><tip><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:345 +msgid "" +"It might helpful to know that <emphasis role=\"bold\">if</emphasis> stands " +"for <emphasis role=\"bold\">i</emphasis>nput <emphasis role=\"bold\">f</" +"emphasis>ile and <emphasis role=\"bold\">of</emphasis> stands for <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">o</emphasis>utput <emphasis role=\"bold\">f</emphasis>ile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:349 +msgid "Enter the command: # <userinput>sync</userinput>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:352 +msgid "This is the end of the process, and you may now unplug your USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:3 +msgid "Select your Country / Region" +msgstr "" + +#. Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6 +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:14 +msgid "" +"Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, " +"like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country " +"can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:19 +msgid "" +"If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other Countries</" +"guilabel> option and choose your country / region there." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:24 +msgid "" +"If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list, " +"after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem that a country from the " +"first list was chosen. Please ignore this, as DrakX will apply your actual " +"choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:33 +msgid "Input method" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:36 +msgid "" +"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an " +"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input " +"multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the " +"default input method, so users should not need to configure it manually. " +"Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions " +"and can be installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package selection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:45 +msgid "" +"If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it " +"after you boot your installed system via <emphasis role=\"bold\">Configure " +"your Computer</emphasis> -> <emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis>, or by " +"running localedrake as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:14 +msgid "Install or Upgrade" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"selectInstallClass.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:25 +msgid "Install" +msgstr "安裝" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Use this option to perform a fresh installation of <application>Mageia</" +"application>. This will format the root partition (/), but can preserve a " +"separated /home partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:33 +msgid "Upgrade" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:35 +msgid "" +"This can be used to upgrade an existing installation of <application>Mageia</" +"application>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still " +"supported</emphasis> when this installer's version was released, has been " +"thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that has reached " +"its End Of Life, then it is better to do a clean install instead while " +"preserving your <literal>/home</literal> partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:50 +msgid "" +"If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to " +"reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been " +"formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in " +"the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an " +"unusable system. If in spite of that, and only if you are very sure " +"rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing <guilabel>Alt " +"Ctrl F2</guilabel> simultaneously. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl " +"Delete</guilabel> simultaneously to reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:62 +msgid "" +"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you " +"can return from the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Install or Upgrade</emphasis> " +"screen to the language choice screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</" +"guilabel> simultaneously. <emphasis role=\"bold\">Do not</emphasis> do this " +"later in the install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:3 +msgid "Select keyboard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"selectKeyboardLive-im1\" revision=\"1\" " +"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"live-selectKeyboard.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You will be required to set the keyboard layout you wish to use in Mageia. " +"The default one is selected according to your language and timezone " +"previously selected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:7 +msgid "Keyboard" +msgstr "鍵盤" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:10 +msgid "" +"DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable " +"keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png\" align=\"center\"/" +"> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:22 +msgid "" +"Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard layout. " +"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications " +"that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a " +"label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: " +"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en." +"wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:31 +msgid "" +"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton>More</" +"guibutton> to get a fuller list, and select your keyboard there." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><warning><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:36 +msgid "" +"After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog, " +"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though " +"a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this and " +"continue the installation: the keyboard chosen from the full list will be " +"applied." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:46 +msgid "" +"If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an " +"extra dialogue screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the " +"Latin and non-Latin keyboard layouts" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:15 +msgid "Please choose a language to use" +msgstr "請選擇要使用那個語言。" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:18 +msgid "" +"Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your " +"continent. <application>Mageia</application> will use this selection during " +"the installation and for your installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Select your preferred language. <application>Mageia</application> will use " +"this selection during the installation and for your installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:27 +msgid "" +"If it is likely that you (or others) will require several languages to be " +"installed on your system, then you should use the <guibutton>Multiple " +"languages</guibutton> option to add them now. It will be difficult to add " +"extra language support after installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:33 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-language.png\" format=\"\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:43 +msgid "" +"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one as your " +"preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be marked as " +"chosen in the multiple languages screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:50 +msgid "" +"If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then " +"it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:56 +msgid "Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:58 +msgid "" +"This may be disabled in the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Multiple languages</" +"emphasis> screen if you know that it is inappropriate for your language. " +"Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed languages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:64 +msgid "" +"You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia " +"Control Center -> System -> Manage localization for your system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:4 +msgid "Select mouse" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 11 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place +#. marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" align=\"center\" " +"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:23 +msgid "" +"If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a " +"different one here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB mice</" +"guilabel> is a good choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Select <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> to " +"configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:7 +msgid "Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:11 +msgid "" +"To do this you need to manually edit /boot/grub2/custom.cfg or use the " +"software <emphasis role=\"bold\">grub-customizer</emphasis> tool instead " +"(available in the Mageia repositories)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:16 +msgid "" +"For more information, see: <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-" +"efi_and_Mageia\">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:7 +msgid "Bootloader main options" +msgstr "開機載入程式主要選項" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:10 +msgid "Bootloader interface" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:11 +msgid "By default, Mageia uses exclusively:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:14 +msgid "" +"GRUB2 (with or without graphical menu) for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:18 +msgid "GRUB2-efi for a UEFI system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:22 +msgid "The Mageia graphical menus are nice :)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:25 +msgid "GRUB2 on Legacy/MBR and Legacy/GPT systems" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloader.png\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"setupBootloader.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:34 en/setupBootloader.xml:56 +msgid "" +"Don't modify the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot Device</emphasis> unless you " +"really know what you are doing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:38 +msgid "GRUB2-efi on UEFI systems" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:39 +msgid "" +"With a UEFI system, the user interface is slightly different as you cannot " +"choose between the <emphasis role=\"bold\">with</emphasis> or <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">without graphical menu</emphasis> options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:42 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloader2.png\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-setupBootloader2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:49 +msgid "" +"If Mageia is the only system installed on your computer, the installer " +"created an ESP (EFI System Partition) to house the bootloader (GRUB2-efi). " +"If there are already UEFI operating systems installed on your computer " +"(Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer detects the existing ESP " +"created by Windows and adds GRUB2-efi. Although it is possible to have " +"several ESPs, only one is required (and advised), whatever the number of " +"operating systems you have." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:61 +msgid "Using a Mageia bootloader" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:62 +msgid "" +"By default, and according to your system, Mageia writes one of the following:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:66 +msgid "" +"a GRUB2 bootloader either into the MBR (Master Boot Record) of your first " +"hard drive or in the BIOS boot partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:70 +msgid "a GRUB2-efi bootloader into the ESP" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:73 +msgid "" +"If you already have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to " +"add them to your new Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, " +"click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> and then untick the <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">Probe Foreign OS</emphasis> option." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:78 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-setupBootloader3.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-setupBootloader3.png\" align=\"center\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:87 +msgid "Using an existing bootloader" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:88 +msgid "" +"The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader " +"is beyond the scope of this documentation, however in most cases it will " +"involve running the relevant bootloader installation program which should " +"detect and add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating " +"system in question." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:95 +msgid "Using chain loading" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:96 +msgid "" +"If you don't want a bootable Mageia, but to chain-load it from another OS, " +"click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton>, then on <guibutton>Advanced</" +"guibutton> and tick the box <guilabel>Do not touch ESP or MBR</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:101 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloader4.png\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-setupBootloader4.png\" align=" +"\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:108 +msgid "" +"You will get a warning that the bootloader is missing, ignore it by clicking " +"<guibutton>OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:111 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-setupBootloader5.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:117 +msgid "Options" +msgstr "選項" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:119 +msgid "First page" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:120 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Delay before booting the default image</guilabel>: This lets you " +"set a delay in seconds before the default operating system is started up." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:122 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Security</guilabel>: This allows you to set a password for the " +"bootloader. This means a username and password will be required when booting " +"to select a booting entry or change settings. The username is <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">root</emphasis> and the password is the one chosen here-after." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:125 +msgid "<guilabel>Password</guilabel>: Choose a password for the bootloader." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:126 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the password and DrakX will " +"check that it matches with the one above." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:127 en/setupBootloader.xml:159 +msgid "<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:127 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Enable ACPI:</guilabel> ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power " +"Interface) is a standard for power management. It can save energy by " +"stopping unused devices. Deselecting it could be useful if, for example, " +"your computer does not support ACPI or if you think the ACPI implementation " +"might cause some problems (for instance random reboots or system lockups)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:133 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Enable SMP</guilabel>: This option enables/disables symmetric " +"multiprocessing for multi core processors." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:135 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Enable APIC</guilabel>: This gives the operating system access to " +"the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. APIC devices permit more " +"complex priority models, and Advanced IRQ (Interrupt Request) management." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:138 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Enable Local APIC</guilabel>: Local APIC manages all external " +"interrupts for a specific processor in an SMP system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:143 +msgid "Next page" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:146 +msgid "<guilabel>Default:</guilabel> Operating system started up by default" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:150 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Append:</guilabel> This option lets you pass the kernel " +"information or tell the kernel to give you more information as it boots." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:155 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Probe foreign OS</guilabel>: see above <link linkend=" +"\"setupMageiaBootloader\">Using a Mageia bootloader</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:159 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Video mode:</guilabel> This sets the screen size and colour depth " +"to be used by the boot menu. If you click the down triangle you will be " +"offered other size and colour depth options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:162 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Do not touch ESP or MBR</emphasis>: see above <link " +"linkend=\"setupChainLoading\">Using the chain loading</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:3 +msgid "Setup SCSI" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 02 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 +#. SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) +#. barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the +#. Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:22 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" align=" +"\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:27 +msgid "" +"DrakX will normally detect hard disks correctly. However, with some older " +"SCSI controllers it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use " +"and subsequently fail to recognise the drive." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:32 +msgid "" +"If this happens, you will need to manually tell DrakX which SCSI drive(s) " +"you have." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:35 +msgid "DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:3 +msgid "Sound Configuration" +msgstr "聲音設定" + +#. Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-soundConfig.png\" xml:" +"id=\"soundConfig-im1\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:14 +msgid "" +"In this screen the name of the driver that the installer chose for your " +"sound card is given, which will be the default driver if one exists." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:18 +msgid "" +"The default driver should work without problems. However, if after install " +"you do encounter problems, then run <command>draksound</command> or start " +"this tool via MCC (Mageia Control Center), by choosing the " +"<guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> tab and clicking on <guilabel>Sound " +"Configuration</guilabel> at the top right of the screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:24 +msgid "" +"Then, in the <emphasis role=\"bold\">draksound</emphasis> or <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">Sound Configuration</emphasis> tool screen, click on " +"<guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> to find useful advice about how to " +"solve the problem." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:30 +msgid "Advanced" +msgstr "進階" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Clicking <emphasis role=\"bold\"><guibutton>Advanced</guibutton></emphasis> " +"in this screen, during install, is useful if there is no default driver and " +"there are several drivers available, but you think the installer selected " +"the wrong one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:38 +msgid "" +"In that case you can select a different driver after clicking on <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\"><guibutton>Let me pick any driver</guibutton></emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:3 +msgid "Confirm hard disk to be formatted" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 03 +#. test comment - johnr +#. 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct +#. hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I +#. saw this help screen when I had only one HD +#. 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"live\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"live-" +"takeOverHdConfirm.png\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"takeOverHdConfirm.png\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:27 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are at all unsure about your " +"choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to proceed if you are sure that it is " +"ok to erase every partition, every operating system and all data that might " +"be on that hard disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:9 +msgid "Testing Mageia as Live system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:14 +msgid "Live mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/testing.xml:18 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:23 +msgid "" +"You get this screen if you selected \"Boot Mageia\". If not, you get the " +"\"<link linkend=\"doPartitionDisks\">Partitioning</link> step\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:28 +msgid "Testing hardware" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:31 +msgid "" +"One of the Live mode goals is to test if the hardware is correctly managed " +"by Mageia. You can check if all devices have a driver in the Hardware " +"section of the Mageia Control Center. You can test the most current devices:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:38 +msgid "network interface: configure it with net_applet" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:42 +msgid "graphical card: if you see the previous screen, it's already OK." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:47 +msgid "webcam:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:51 +msgid "sound: a jingle has already been played" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:55 +msgid "printer: configure it and print a test page" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:59 +msgid "scanner: scan a document from ..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:63 +msgid "" +"If all is OK for you, you can process to the installation. If not, you can " +"leave with the quit button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><remark> +#: en/testing.xml:66 +msgid "The configuration settings you made here are kept for the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:72 +msgid "Launch installation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/testing.xml:76 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode-install.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:81 +msgid "" +"To launch the installation of Mageia LiveCD or Live DVD to the hard disc or " +"SSD drive, simply click on the icon \"Install on Hard Disk\". You will get " +"this screen, and then the \"<link linkend=\"doPartitionDisks\">Partitioning</" +"link> step\" as for the direct installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:3 +msgid "Uninstalling Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:9 +msgid "" +"If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly - in short " +"you want get rid of it - that is your right and Mageia also gives you the " +"possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:14 +msgid "" +"After your data backup, reboot your Mageia installation DVD and select " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Rescue system</emphasis>, then, <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Restore Windows boot loader</emphasis>. At the next boot, you will only " +"have Windows, with no option to choose your operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:19 +msgid "" +"In Windows to recover the space used by Mageia partitions: click on " +"<code>Start -> Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Computer Management -" +"> Storage -> Disk Management</code>. You will recognize a Mageia partition " +"because they are labeled <guilabel>Unknown</guilabel>, and also by their " +"size and place on the disk. Right click on each of these partitions and " +"select <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> to free up the space." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:27 +msgid "" +"If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it " +"(FAT32 or NTFS). It will get a partition letter." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:30 +msgid "" +"If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the " +"existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other " +"partitioning tools that can be used, such as <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">gparted</emphasis>, available for both Windows and Linux. As always, when " +"changing partitions, be very careful to back up anything important to you." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/unused.xml:9 +msgid "Keep or delete unused material" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/unused.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-unused.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"unused-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/unused.xml:19 +msgid "" +"In this step, the installer looks for unused locales packages and unused " +"hardware packages. Then it proposes you to delete them. It is a good idea to " +"accept, except if you prepare an installation which has to run on different " +"hardware." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/unused.xml:25 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../live-unused-InstallationProgress.png\"/" +"> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/unused.xml:30 +msgid "" +"The next step is the copying of files on hard disk. This takes some minutes. " +"At the end, you get a blank screen for some time, it's normal." +msgstr "" diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/DrakLive-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/DrakLive-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..44e13410 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/DrakLive-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="Quick-Startup"> + <info> + <title>Installation from LIVE medium</title> + <publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher> + <revhistory> + <revision> + <date>January 2015</date> + <revremark>Mageia 5</revremark> + </revision> + </revhistory> + <cover> + <para role="tagline">Mageia的官方文件</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="mageia-2013.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>. + </para> + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>. + </para> + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + <article> + <title>Installation from LIVE medium</title> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bootLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bestTime.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboardLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="testing.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="unused.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="reboot.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="login.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> + </article> +</book>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/DrakLive.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/DrakLive.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d45a5253 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/DrakLive.xml @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="Quick-Startup"> + <info> + <title>Installation from LIVE medium</title> + + <cover> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bootLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bestTime.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboardLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="testing.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="unused.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="reboot.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="login.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> +</article>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/DrakX-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/DrakX-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..26e54e5a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/DrakX-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="Quick-Startup"> + <info> + <title>Installation with DrakX</title> + <publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher> + <revhistory> + <revision> + <date>February 2014</date> + <revremark>Mageia 4</revremark> + </revision> + </revhistory> + <cover> + <para role="tagline">Mageia的官方文件</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../mageia-2013.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>. + </para> + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>. + </para> + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + <article> + + + + + + +<!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before--> +<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed --> +<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva --> +<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml --> +<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml --> +<title>Installation with DrakX</title> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/> + --> +<xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="installer.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml"> +</xi:include> + + <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/> + +<xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="firewall.xml"/> + + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> + </article> +</book> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/DrakX.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/DrakX.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7f15e78 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/DrakX.xml @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="Quick-Startup"> + <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before--> +<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed --> +<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva --> +<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml --> +<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml --> +<!--2014-05-07 add selectAndUseISOs2.xml Papoteur--> +<!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/> + --> +<info> + <title>Installation with DrakX</title> + + <cover> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="installer.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml"> +</xi:include> + + <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureServices.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="firewall.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> +</article>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b33e3b0d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,345 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs"> + + <info> + <!-- Made by Lebarhon 2014 03 26 + +Lebarhon updated for Mageia 6 2016 12 16 (still waiting for clarification about 1.3.2--> +<title xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs-ti1">Select and use ISOs</title> + </info> + <section> + <title>前言</title> + <para>Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose +which image best suits your needs.</para> + <para>There are two families of media:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Classical installer: Booting with this media provides you with the maximum +flexibility when choosing what to install, and for configuring your +system. In particular, you have a choice of which Desktop environment to +install</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>LIVE media: This option allows you to try out Mageia without having to +actually install it, or make any changes to your computer. If the +installation is decided, the process is simpler, but you get fewer choices +than offered by the Classical installer</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <para>Details are given in the next sections.</para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Media</title> + <section> + <title>Definition</title> + <para>Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to +install and/or update Mageia and by extension any physical support (DVD, USB +stick, ...) the ISO file is copied to.</para> + <para>You can find Mageia ISO's <link +ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/">here</link>.</para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Classical installation media</title> + <section> + <title>Common features</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>These ISOs use the Classical installer called drakx.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>They are used for performing clean installs or to upgrade a previously +installed version of Mageia.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Different media for 32 and 64 bit architectures.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Some tools are available in the Welcome screen: Rescue System, Memory Test, +Hardware Detection Tool.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Each DVD contains many available desktop environments and languages.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>You'll be given the choice during the installation to add non free software.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <title>Live media</title> + <section> + <title>Common features</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Can be used to preview the Mageia operating system without having to install +it. Can also be used to install Mageia if you wish.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (Plasma, GNOME or Xfce).</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Different media for 32 and 64 bit architectures.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Live ISOs can only be used to create clean +installations, they cannot be used to upgrade previously installed Mageia +releases.</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>They contain non free software.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>Live DVD Plasma</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Plasma desktop environment only.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>All available languages are present.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>64 bit architecture only.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>Live DVD GNOME</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>GNOME desktop environment only.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>All available languages are present.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>64 bit architecture only</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>Live DVD Xfce</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Xfce desktop environment only.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>All available languages are present.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>32 or 64 bit architectures.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <title>Net install media</title> + <section> + <title>Common features</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>These are minimal ISO's containing no more than that which is needed to +start the drakx installer and find drakx-installer-stage2 and other packages +that are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be +on the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the +Internet.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient if +bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, or if you have a PC without a +DVD drive or is unable to boot from a USB stick.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Different media for 32 and 64 bit architectures.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>First steps are English language only.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>netinstall.iso</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Contains only free software, for those people who prefer not to use non-free +software.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>netinstall-nonfree.iso</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Contains non-free software (mostly drivers, codecs...) for people who need +it.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <title>Downloading and Checking Media</title> + <section> + <title>Downloading</title> + <para>Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or +BitTorrent. In both cases, you are provided with some information, such as +the mirror in use and an option to switch if the bandwidth is too low. If +http is chosen, you will also see something regarding checksums.</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Checking.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>md5sum and sha1sum are tools to check the ISO integrity. Choose one or the +other, and copy the checksum <link linkend="integrity">for later +use</link>. Then a window similar to this one appears:</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Download.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>Select the Save File option, then, click OK.</para> + </section> + <section> + <title xml:id="integrity">Checking the integrity of the downloaded media</title> + <para>The checksums referred to earlier, are digital fingerprints generated by an +algorithm from the file to be downloaded. You may compare the checksum of +your downloaded ISO against that of the original source ISO. If the +checksums do not match, it means that the actual data on the ISO's do not +match, and if it is the case, then you should retry the download or attempt +a repair using BitTorrent.</para> + <para>To generate the checksum for your downloaded ISO, open a console, (no need +to be root), and:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>To use md5sum, type: <userinput>md5sum +path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput>.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>To use sha1sum, type: <userinput>sha1sum +path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <para> Example:</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../Md5sum.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>and compare the result (you may have to wait for a while) with the checksum +provided by Mageia.</para> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <title>Burn or dump the ISO</title> + <para>The verified ISO can now be burned to a CD/DVD or dumped to a USB +stick. This is not a standard copy operation as a bootable medium will +actually be created.</para> + <section> + <title>Burning the ISO to a CD/DVD</title> + <para>Whichever software you use, ensure that the option to burn an <emphasis +role="bold">image</emphasis> is used, burn <emphasis +role="bold">data</emphasis> or <emphasis role="bold">files</emphasis> is not +correct. See <link +ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images">the Mageia +wiki</link> for more information.</para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Dump the ISO to a USB stick</title> + <para>All Mageia ISOs are hybrids, which means you can 'dump' them to a USB stick +and then use it to boot and install the system.</para> + <warning> + <para>"Dumping" an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system on +the device; any existing data will be lost and the partition capacity will +be reduced to the image size.</para> + </warning> + <para>To recover the original capacity, you must redo partitioning and re-format +the USB stick.</para> + <section> + <title>Using a graphical tool within Mageia</title> + <para>You can use a graphical tool like <link +ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks">IsoDumper</link></para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Using a graphical tool within Windows</title> + <para>You could try:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><link ns4:href="http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US">Rufus</link> using the +"ISO image" option;</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><link ns4:href="http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager">Win32 Disk +Imager</link></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>Using Command line within a GNU/Linux system</title> + <warning> + <para>It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk overwriting +potentially valuable existing data if you specify the wrong target device.</para> + </warning> + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Open a console</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Become a root (Administrator) user with the command <userinput>su +-</userinput> (don't forget the final '-' )</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../Root.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Plug in your USB stick (do not mount it, this also means do not open any +application or file manager that could access or read it)</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Enter the command <userinput>fdisk -l</userinput></para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../Fdisk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example +<code>/dev/sdb</code> in the screenshot above, it is an 8GB USB stick.</para> + <para>Alternatively, you can find the device name with the command +<code>dmesg</code>: towards the end of this example, you can see the device +name starting with <emphasis>sd</emphasis>, and in this case, +<emphasis>sdd</emphasis> is the actual device. You can also see that its +size is 2GB:</para> + <para><screen>[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd +[72594.770528] usb 1-1: New USB device found, idVendor=8564, idProduct=1000 +[72594.770533] usb 1-1: New USB device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3 +[72594.770536] usb 1-1: Product: Mass Storage Device +[72594.770537] usb 1-1: Manufacturer: JetFlash +[72594.770539] usb 1-1: SerialNumber: 18MJTWLMPUCC3SSB +[72594.770713] usb 1-1: ep 0x81 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes +[72594.770719] usb 1-1: ep 0x2 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes +[72594.771122] usb-storage 1-1:1.0: USB Mass Storage device detected +[72594.772447] scsi host8: usb-storage 1-1:1.0 +[72595.963238] scsi 8:0:0:0: Direct-Access JetFlash Transcend 2GB 1100 PQ: 0 ANSI: 4 +[72595.963626] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] 4194304 512-byte logical blocks: (2.14 GB/2.00 GiB) +[72595.964104] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Write Protect is off +[72595.964108] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Mode Sense: 43 00 00 00 +[72595.965025] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] No Caching mode page found +[72595.965031] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Assuming drive cache: write through +[72595.967251] <emphasis>sdd</emphasis>: sdd1 +[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk</screen></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Enter the command: <emphasis role="bold"># <userinput>dd +if=path/to/the/ISO/file of=/dev/sdX bs=1M</userinput></emphasis></para> + <para>Where X=your device name eg: /dev/sdd</para> + <para>Example:<emphasis role="bold"> # <userinput>dd +if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso of=/dev/sdd +bs=1M</userinput></emphasis></para> + <tip> + <para>It might helpful to know that <emphasis role="bold">if</emphasis> stands for +<emphasis role="bold">i</emphasis>nput <emphasis role="bold">f</emphasis>ile +and <emphasis role="bold">of</emphasis> stands for <emphasis +role="bold">o</emphasis>utput <emphasis role="bold">f</emphasis>ile</para> + </tip> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Enter the command: # <userinput>sync</userinput></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>This is the end of the process, and you may now unplug your USB stick.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/acceptLicense.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cc1b0d67 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/acceptLicense.xml @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="acceptLicense" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 27 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- JohnR: minor mods 2012-3-30 --> +<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back --> +<!-- JohnR: 2012-04-05 - Inserted text from barjac with some modifications: + http://mtf.no-ip.co.uk/doc/help/license.html --> +<!-- marja:2012-04-05 - having a look because this isn't a DocBook5.0 type anymore, + but text/xml. First changing centimetres in screenshot to pixels ( + ), after that nested the two existing sections into a third one--> +<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 --> +<!-- barjac:2012-04-10 - edited header to correct formatting after my saves - not + sure what is causing the corruption --> +<!-- JohnR 2012-04-19 language proofreading --> +<title xml:id="acceptLicense-ti1">授權與發行記錄</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG" +xml:id="acceptLicense-im1" fileref="dx2-license.png" align="center" +revision="4"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" +fileref="live-license.png" xml:id="acceptLicense-im2" revision="5" +align="center" condition="live"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section xml:id="license"> + <info> + <title xml:id="license-ti1">授權協議</title> + </info> + + <para>在安裝 <application>Mageia</application>之前，請先仔細閱讀許可證條款</para> + + <para>These terms and conditions apply to the entire +<application>Mageia</application> distribution and must be accepted before +you can continue.</para> + + <para>To proceed, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + + <para>If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for +looking. Clicking <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer.</para> + + + <!-- if you want two sections in a file, both need to be nested in a third section - + marja, 20120405 --> +</section> + + <section xml:id="releaseNotes"> + <!-- + <para> +Release Notes</para> +--> +<info> + <title xml:id="releaseNotes-ti1">發行記錄</title> + </info> + + + + <para>Important information about this release of +<application>Mageia</application> can be viewed by clicking on the +<guibutton>Release Notes</guibutton> button.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/addUser.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/addUser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4281d7cd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/addUser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="addUser"> + <info> + <title xml:id="addUser-ti1">User and Superuser Management</title> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Lebarhon: 20170210 updated for Mageia 6 (umask)--> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG" +fileref="dx2-setRootPassword.png" align="center" revision="1" +xml:id="setRootPassword-im1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata +format="PNG" fileref="live-user1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section xml:id="root-password"> + <info> + <title xml:id="root-password-ti2">Set Administrator (root) Password:</title> + </info> + + <para>It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to +set a <emphasis role="bold">superuser</emphasis> (administrator) password, +usually called the <emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type +a password into the top box a shield will change from red to yellow to green +depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are +using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box +underneath, to check that the first entry was not mistyped.</para> + + <note xml:id="givePassword"> + <para>All passwords are case sensitive. It is best to use a mixture of letters +(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section xml:id="enterUser"> + <info> + <title xml:id="enterUser-ti3">輸入一位使用者</title> + </info> + + <para>Add a user here. A regular user has fewer privileges than the <emphasis +role="bold">superuser</emphasis> (root), but enough to use the internet, +office applications or play games and anything else the average user might +use their computer for.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guibutton>Icon</guibutton>: if you click on this button it will change the +user's icon.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Real Name</guilabel>: Insert the user's real name into this text +box.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Enter the user login name or let DrakX use +a version of the user's real name. <emphasis role="bold">The login name is +case sensitive.</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Password</guilabel>: Type in the user password. There is a shield +at the end of the text box that indicates the strength of the password. (See +also <xref linkend="givePassword"/>)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password DrakX will +check that you have not mistyped the password.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <note> + <para>Any users you added while installing Mageia, will have a home directory that +is both read and write protected (umask=0027).</para> + + <para>You can add any extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - +Summary</emphasis> step during the install. Choose <emphasis>User +management</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>The access permissions can also be changed after the install.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section xml:id="addUserAdvanced" condition="classical"> + <info> + <title xml:id="addUserAdvanced-ti3">進階使用者管理</title> + </info> + + <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> option allows you to edit further +settings for the user you are adding.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop-down list allows you to change the +shell available to any user you added in the previous screen. Options are +<emphasis role="bold">Bash</emphasis>, <emphasis role="bold">Dash</emphasis> +and <emphasis role="bold">Sh</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the <emphasis +role="bold">user ID</emphasis> for any user you added in the previous +screen. If you are unsure what the purpose of this is, then leave it blank.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the <emphasis +role="bold">group ID</emphasis>. Again, if unsure, leave it blank.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/add_supplemental_media.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b1e640ae --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/add_supplemental_media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="add_supplemental_media" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="add_supplemental_media-ti1">Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media)</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- papoteur 2013-04-13 - created --> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection --> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell --> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" +fileref="dx2-add_supplemental_media.png" +xml:id="dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1" align="center" revision="1"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This screen shows you the list of already recognized repositories. You can +add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. +The source selection determines which packages will be available during the +next steps.</para> + + <para>For a network source, there are two steps to follow:</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a +mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by +Mageia, like the <emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis>, the <emphasis +role="bold">Tainted</emphasis> repositories and the <emphasis +role="bold">Updates</emphasis>. With the URL, you can designate a specific +repository or your own NFS installation.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <note> + <para>If you are updating a 64 bit installation which may contain some 32 bit +packages, it is advised to use this screen to add an online mirror by +ticking one of the Network protocols here. The 64-bit DVD ISO only contains +64-bit and noarch packages, it will not be able to update the 32-bit +packages. However, after adding an online mirror, the installer will find +the needed 32-bit packages there.</para> + </note> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/ask_mntpoint_s.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ba7c5ab8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/ask_mntpoint_s.xml @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s-ti1">選取掛載點</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 28 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back --> +<!-- removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 --> +<!-- barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE" + with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) --> +<!-- Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes --> +<!-- Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans + write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it--> +<!-- And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) --> +<!-- 2012-04-19 Language proofreading done --> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG" +xml:id="chooseMountPoints-im1" align="center" +fileref="dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject> +<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata format="PNG" +fileref="live-chooseMountpoints.png" align="center" +xml:id="live-chooseMountPoints-im1" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If +you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you +can change the mount points.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you change anything, make sure you still have a <emphasis +role="bold"><literal>/</literal></emphasis> (root) partition.</para> + </note> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Every partition is shown to the left as: <emphasis role="bold">Device +(capacity, mount point, type).</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Device</emphasis>, is made up of: <emphasis +role="bold">hard drive</emphasis>, [<emphasis role="bold">hard drive +name</emphasis> (letter)], <emphasis role="bold">partition number</emphasis> +(for example, <emphasis role="bold">sda5</emphasis>).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If you have several partitions, you can choose various different mount +points from the drop down menu, such as <emphasis role="bold">/</emphasis>, +<emphasis role="bold"><literal>/home</literal></emphasis> and <emphasis +role="bold">/var</emphasis>. You can even make your own mount points, for +instance <emphasis role="bold"><literal>/video</literal></emphasis> for a +partition where you want to store your films, or <emphasis +role="bold">/Data</emphasis> (or some other name) for your data.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>For any partitions that you don't need to make use of, you can leave the +mount point field blank.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <warning> + <para>If you are not sure what to choose, click <emphasis +role="bold">Previous</emphasis> to go back and then tick <guilabel>Custom +disk partitioning</guilabel>, where, you can click on a partition to see its +type and size.</para> + </warning> + + <para>If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the +partition(s) DrakX suggests, or more.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/bestTime.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/bestTime.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..78abf728 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/bestTime.xml @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="bestTime" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="bestTime-ti1">Clock settings</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject condition="live"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-bestTime.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="bestTime-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In this step, you have to select on which time your internal clock is set, +either local time or UTC time.</para> + + <para>In advanced tab, you will find more options about clock settings.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/bootLive.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/bootLive.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..10e2e4dc --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/bootLive.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="bootLive" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"><info><title xml:id="bootLive-ti1">Boot Mageia as Live system</title></info><section xml:id="bootLive-1"><info><title xml:id="bootLive1-ti1">Booting the medium</title></info><section><info><title xml:id="bootLive11-ti1">From a disc</title></info><para>You can boot directly from the media you used to burn your image (CD-ROM, +DVD-ROM...). You usually just need to insert it in your CD/DVD drive for the +bootloader to launch the installation automatically after rebooting the +computer. If that does not happen you may need to reconfigure your BIOS or +press one key that will offer you to choose the peripheral from which the +computer will boot.</para><para>According to which hardware you have, and how it is configured, you get +either one or another of the two screens below.</para></section><section><info><title xml:id="bootLive12-ti1">From a USB device</title></info><para>You can boot from the USB device on which you dumped your image +ISO. According to your BIOS settings, the computer boots perhaps directly on +the USB device already plugged in a port. If that does not happen you may +need to reconfigure your BIOS or press one key that will offer you to choose +the peripheral from which the computer will boot.</para></section></section><section xml:id="biosmode"><info><title xml:id="biosmode-ti1">In BIOS/CSM/Legacy mode</title></info><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../live-bootCSM.png"/></imageobject><caption><para>First screen while booting in BIOS mode</para></caption></mediaobject><para>In the middle menu, you have the choice between three actions:</para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>Boot Mageia: That means Mageia 5 will start from the connected media (CD/DVD +or USB stick) without writing anything on the disk, so expect a very slow +system. Once the boot is done, you can proceed to the installation on a hard +disk.</para></listitem><listitem><para>Install Mageia: This choice will directly install Mageia on a hard disk.</para></listitem><listitem><para>Boot from hard disk: This choice allows to boot from hard disk, as usual, +when no media (CD/DVD or USB stick) is connected. (not working with Mageia +5).</para></listitem></itemizedlist><para>In the bottom menu, are the Boot Options:</para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>F1 - Help. Explain the options "splash", "apm", "acpi" and "Ide"</para></listitem><listitem><para>F2 - Language. Choose the display language of the screens.</para></listitem><listitem><para>F3 - Screen resolution. Choose between text, 640x400, 800x600, 1024x728</para></listitem><listitem><para>F4 - CD-Rom. CD-Rom or Other. Normally, the installation is performed from +the inserted installation medium. Here, select other sources, like FTP or +NFS servers. If the installation is carried out in a network with an SLP +server, select one of the installation sources available on the server with +this option.</para></listitem><listitem><para>F5 - Driver. Yes or No. The system is aware about the presence of an +optional disk with a driver update and will require its insertion during +installation process.</para></listitem><listitem><para>F6 - Kernel options. This is a way to specify options according to your +hardware and the drivers to use.</para></listitem></itemizedlist></section><section xml:id="uefimode"><info><title xml:id="uefimode-ti1">In UEFI mode</title></info><mediaobject condition="live"><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG" fileref="../live-bootUEFI.png" +align="center" xml:id="bootUEFI-im1" revision="1"/></imageobject><caption><para>First screen while booting on UEFI system from disk</para></caption></mediaobject><para>You have only the choice to run Mageia in Live mode (first choice) or to +process the installation (second choice).</para><para>If you booted from a USB stick, you get two supplemental lines which are a +duplicata of the previous lines suffixed with "USB". You have to choose +them.</para><para>In each case, the first steps will be the same to choose language, timezone +and keyboard, then the processes differ, with <link +linkend="testing">additional steps in Live mode</link>.</para></section></section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/chooseDesktop.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..72b1cb76 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/chooseDesktop.xml @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="chooseDesktop"> + <!--Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC--> +<info> + <title xml:id="chooseDesktop-ti1">桌面環境選擇</title> + </info> + + + + <para>Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to +fine-tune your choice.</para> + + <para>After the selection step(s), you will see a slide-show during package +installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the +<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-chooseDesktop.png" +align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application> +<emphasis role="bold">Plasma</emphasis> or <application>GNOME</application> +desktop environment. Both come with a full set of useful applications and +tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you wish to use neither (or even +use both), or if you want to modify the default software choices for these +desktop environments. The <application>LXDE</application> desktop, for +instance, is lighter than the previous two, sporting less eye candy and +fewer packages installed by default.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/choosePackageGroups.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..563d2192 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/choosePackageGroups.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="choosePackageGroups"> + <info> + <title xml:id="choosePackageGroups-ti1">軟體包群組選擇</title> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject> +<!--Lebarhon 20170209 Updated SC--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-choosePackageGroups.png" +align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Packages are arranged into common groups, to make choosing what you need on +your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however +more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which +become visible as the mouse is hovered over them.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Workstation</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Server</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Graphical Environment</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Individual Package Selection</emphasis>: you can use +this option to manually add or remove packages</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>See <xref linkend="minimal-install"/> for instructions on how to do a +minimal install (without or with X & IceWM).</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/choosePackagesTree.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bad05f8d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/choosePackagesTree.xml @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="choosePackagesTree" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="choosePackagesTree-ti1">Choose Individual Packages</title> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject> +<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" +align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customize your +installation.</para> + + <para>After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy +icon</guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages +(saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the +same packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install +and choosing to load it.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/configureServices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/configureServices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..925dc60b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/configureServices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="configureServices"> + <info> + <title xml:id="configureServices-ti1">Configure your Services</title> + </info> + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot --> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-configureServices.png" +xml:id="configureServices-im1" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="configureServices-pa1" revision="1">Here you can choose which services should start when you boot your system.</para> + + <para xml:id="configureServices-pa2" revision="1">Click on a triangle to expand a group to all the relevant services.</para> + + <para xml:id="configureServices-pa3" revision="1">The settings DrakX chose are usually good.</para> + + <para xml:id="configureServices-pa4" revision="1">If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info +box below.</para> + + <para xml:id="configureServices-pa5" revision="1">Only change things when you know very well what you are doing.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/configureTimezoneUTC.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a37ed630 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/configureTimezoneUTC.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-ti6">Configure your Timezone</title> + </info> + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot --> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG" +xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-im1" align="center" +fileref="dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="live-timeZone.png" +condition="live"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1" revision="1">Choose your time-zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the +same time-zone.</para> + + <para xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2" revision="1">In the next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time +or to GMT, also known as UTC.</para> + + <note> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa3">If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they +are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT.</para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/configureX_card_list.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..da98e81b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/configureX_card_list.xml @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_card_list" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Initiated by Marja 2012-08-08 --> +<!-- Further text JohnR 2012-08-29 --> +<!-- tproof --> +<!-- lproof --> +<!-- Done corrections accordind to tmb remarks. Papoteur --> +<title xml:id="configureX_card_list-ti1">Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="configureX_card_list-im1" +align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_card_list.png" revision="1"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually +correctly identify your video device.</para> + + <para>If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know +which one you have, you can select it from the tree by: <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>vendor</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>then the name of your card</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>and the type of card</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para>If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in +the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the +<emphasis role="bold">Xorg</emphasis> category, which provides more than 40 +generic and open source video card drivers. If you still can't find a +specific driver for your card there is the option of using the <emphasis +role="bold">vesa</emphasis> driver which provides basic capabilities.</para> + + <para>Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access +to the <emphasis role="bold">Command-line</emphasis> Interface.</para> + + <para>Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which +may only be available in the <emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis> +repository and in some cases only from the card manufacturers' websites.</para> + + <para>The <emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis> repository needs to be +explicitly enabled to access them. If you didn't enable it previously, you +should do this after your first reboot.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/configureX_chooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..68219389 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/configureX_chooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_chooser" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="configureX_chooser-ti1">Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration</title> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="configureX_chooser-im1" +fileref="dx2-configureX_chooser.png" align="center" revision="1"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa1">No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) +you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are +all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window +System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for +<acronym>KDE</acronym> Plasma, <acronym>GNOME</acronym>, +<acronym>LXDE</acronym> or any other graphical environment to work well, the +following <acronym>X</acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the +correct settings if none are shown, or if you think the details are +incorrect.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa2" revision="1"><emphasis><guibutton>Graphic card</guibutton></emphasis>: Choose your card +from the list if needed.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3" revision="1"><emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose +<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> if applicable, or choose your monitor from +the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list. Choose +<guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the horizontal and +vertical refresh rates of your monitor.</para> + + <warning> + <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3a" revision="1">Incorrect refresh rates may damage your monitor</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa4" revision="1"><emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: The resolution and +color depth of your monitor can be set here.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa5" revision="1"><emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not +always appear during install. If the option is there, and you test your +settings, you should be ask whether your settings are correct. If you answer +<emphasis role="bold">yes</emphasis>, the settings will be kept. If you +don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen and be able to +reconfigure everything until the test result is satisfactory. If the test +option is not available, then make sure your settings are on the safe side.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa6" revision="1"><emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to +enable or disable various options.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/configureX_monitor.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b21d06ed --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/configureX_monitor.xml @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_monitor" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Initiated by Marga 2012-8-09 --> +<!-- Further text JohnR 2012-08-30 --> +<!-- tproof --> +<!----> +<title xml:id="configureX_monitor-ti1">Choosing your Monitor</title> + </info> + + <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1" revision="1">DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually +correctly identify yours.</para> + + <warning> + <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1w" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Selecting a monitor with different characteristics +could damage your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something +without knowing what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should +consult your monitor documentation.</para> + </warning> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="configureX_monitor-im1" +fileref="dx2-configureX_monitor.png" align="center" revision="1"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa2" revision="1"><emphasis>Custom</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa3">This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh +rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the +screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are +displayed.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa4">It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor +type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you +may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and +consult your monitor documentation.</para> + + <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa5" revision="1"><emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa6" revision="1">This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the +monitor database.</para> + + <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa7" revision="1"><emphasis>Vendor</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa8" revision="1">If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which +one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting: <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>vendor</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the monitor manufacturers name</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the monitor description</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa9" revision="1"><emphasis>Generic</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa10" revision="1">selecting this group will list nearly 30 display configurations such as +1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is +often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the <emphasis +role="bold">Vesa</emphasis> card driver when your video hardware cannot be +determined automatically. Once again it may be wise to be conservative in +your selections.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/diskdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/diskdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cbdeb1ab --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/diskdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="diskdrake"> + + + <info> + <!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6 + +Lebarhon 20170902 added SC--> +<title xml:id="diskdrake-ti1">Custom disk partitioning with DiskDrake</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake.png" +align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata +fileref="live-diskdrake.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <warning> + <para revision="3" xml:id="diskdrake-pa1">If you wish to use encryption on your <emphasis role="bold">/</emphasis> +partition you must ensure that you have a separate <emphasis +role="bold">/boot</emphasis> partition. The encryption option for the +<emphasis role="bold">/boot</emphasis> partition must NOT be set, otherwise +your system will be unbootable.</para> + </warning> + + <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa3" revision="2">Modify the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create +partitions, change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even +view their details before you start.</para> + + <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa4" revision="1">There is a tab at the top for every detected hard disk (or other storage +device like a USB key). In the screen-shot above there are two available +devices: <emphasis role="bold">sda </emphasis>and <emphasis +role="bold">sdb</emphasis>.</para> + + <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa5" revision="1">Take care with the <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> option, use it only if +you are sure you want to wipe all partitions on the selected storage device.</para> + + <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa6" revision="1">For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, +or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe +it. <guibutton>Expert mode</guibutton> provides more options such as a label +(give a name to) a partition, or to choose a partition type.</para> + + <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa6a" revision="1">Continue until you have adjusted everything to your satisfaction.</para> + + <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa7" revision="1">Click <guibutton>Done</guibutton> when you're ready.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you are installing Mageia on a UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI System +Partition) is present and correctly mounted on /boot/EFI (see below)</para> + + <para><mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake2.png" +align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata +align="center" fileref="live-diskdrake2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para> + </note> + + <note> + <para>If you are installing Mageia on a Legacy/GPT system, check that a BIOS boot +partition is present and of the correct type</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/doPartitionDisks.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..545a4810 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/doPartitionDisks.xml @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="doPartitionDisks"> + + + + + <info> + <!----> +<!-- lebarhon 20161216 updated for Mageia 6 + +lebarhon 20170209 added SC--> +<title xml:id="doPartitionDisks-ti1">分割磁區</title> + </info> + + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa1" revision="1">In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) along with the +DrakX partitioning proposals for where to install +<application>Mageia</application>.</para> + + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa2" revision="1">The options available from those shown below will vary according to the +layout and content of your particular hard drive(s).</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata +fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks.png" align="center"/> </imageobject> +<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata +fileref="live-doPartitionDisks.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa3"><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa4">Use Existing Partitions</para> + + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa5" revision="1">If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have +been found and may be used for the installation.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa6" revision="1">Use Free Space</para> + + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa7" revision="1">If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for +your new Mageia installation.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa8" revision="1">Use Free Space on a Windows Partition</para> + + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa9" revision="1">If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may +offer to use it.</para> + + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa10" revision="2">This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation, +but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all +important files!</para> + + <para revision="3" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa11">Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The +partition must be "clean", meaning that Windows must have closed down +correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, +although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been +moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to +back up your personal files.</para> + + <para>With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in +light blue and the proposed Mageia partition in dark blue with their +intended sizes just underneath. You have the option to modify these sizes by +clicking and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the following +screen-shot.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata +fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png" align="center"/> </imageobject> +<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata +fileref="live-doPartitionDisks2.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa12" revision="1">Erase and use Entire Disk.</para> + + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa13" revision="1">This option will allocate the entire drive for Mageia.</para> + + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa14" revision="1">Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care!</para> + + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa15" revision="1">If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already +have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use +this option.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa16" revision="1">自訂磁碟分割</para> + + <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa17" revision="1">This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your +hard drive(s).</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Partition sizing:</emphasis></para> + + <para>If you are not using the <emphasis role="bold">Custom disk +partitioning</emphasis> option, the installer will allocate the available +space according to the following rules:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the total available space is less than 50 GB, then only one partition is +created. This will be the <emphasis role="bold">/</emphasis> (root) +partition.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If the total available space is greater than 50 GB, then three partitions +are created</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>6/19 of the total available place is allocated to <emphasis +role="bold">/</emphasis> with a maximum of 50 GB</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>1/19 is allocated to swap with a maximum of 4 GB</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to <emphasis +role="bold">/home.</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para>That means that from 160 GB or greater available space, the installer will +create three partitions: 50 GB for <emphasis role="bold">/</emphasis>, 4 GB +for <emphasis role="bold">swap</emphasis> and the remainder for <emphasis +role="bold">/home</emphasis>.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you are using a UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be +automatically detected - or created if it does not exist yet, and mounted on +/boot/EFI. The <emphasis role="bold">Custom disk partitioning</emphasis> +option is the only one that allows to check it has been correctly done</para> + </note> + + <note> + <para>If you are using a Legacy (CSM or BIOS) system with a GPT disk, you need to +create a BIOS boot partition if not already existing. It is a roughly 1 MiB +partition with no mount point. Choose <xref linkend="diskdrake"/> to be able +to create it with the Installer like any other partition, just select BIOS +boot partition as the filesystem type.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata fileref="live-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks4.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + </note> + + <warning> + <para>Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the +previous standard of 512. Due to lack of available hardware, the +partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested with such a +drive. Also some SSD devices now use an erase block size over 1 MB. If you +have such a device we suggest that you partition the drive in advance, using +an alternative partitioning tool like <emphasis +role="bold">gparted</emphasis>, and to use the following settings:</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Align to</emphasis> = MiB</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Free space preceding (MiB)</emphasis> = 2</para> + + <para>Also make sure all partitions are created using an even number of megabytes.</para> + </warning> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/exitInstall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/exitInstall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..de835f86 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/exitInstall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="exitInstall" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="exitInstall-ti1">恭喜</title> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-exitInstall.png" +align="center" revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa1" revision="2">You have finished installing and configuring +<application>Mageia</application> and it is now safe to remove the +installation medium and reboot your computer.</para> + + <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa2" revision="2">After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating +systems (if there are more than one) on your computer.</para> + + <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa3" revision="1">If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install +will be automatically selected and started.</para> + + <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa4" revision="1">Enjoy!</para> + + <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa5" revision="1">Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to +Mageia</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/firewall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/firewall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d597b913 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/firewall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="firewall" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="firewall-ti1">防火牆</title> + </info> + + <para xml:id="firewall-pa1" revision="1">This section allows you to configure some simple firewall rules: they +determine which type of message from the Internet will be accepted by the +target system. This, in turn, allows the corresponding services on the +system to be accessible from the Internet.</para> + + <para>In the default setting (no button is checked), no service of the system is +accessible from the network. The <emphasis role="bold">Everything (no +firewall)</emphasis> enables access to all services of the machine - an +option that does not make much sense in the context of the installer since +it would create a totally unprotected system. Its veritable use is in the +context of the Mageia Control Center (which uses the same GUI layout) for +temporarily disabling the entire set of firewall rules for testing and +debugging purposes.</para> + + <para>All other options are more or less self-explanatory. As an example, you will +enable the <emphasis role="bold">CUPS server</emphasis> if you want printers +on your machine to be accessible from the network.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Advanced</emphasis></para> + + <para>The <emphasis role="bold">Advanced</emphasis> option opens a window where +you can enable a series of services by typing a list of couples (blank +separated)</para> + + <para><emphasis><port-number>/<protocol></emphasis></para> + + <simplelist> + <member>- <emphasis><port-number></emphasis> is the value of the port assigned to +the service you want to enable (e.g. 873 for the RSYNC service) as defined +in <emphasis>RFC-433</emphasis>;</member> + + <member>- <emphasis><protocol></emphasis> is one of <emphasis>TCP</emphasis> or +<emphasis>UDP</emphasis> - the internet protocol that is used by the +service.</member> + </simplelist> + + <para>For instance, the entry for enabling access to the RSYNC service therefore +is <emphasis>873/tcp</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>In case a service is implemented to use both protocols, you specify 2 +couples for the same port.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/formatPartitions.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..79914841 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/formatPartitions.xml @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="formatPartitions" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="formatPartitions-ti1">Formatting</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 29 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 --> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG" +fileref="dx2-formatPartitions.png" xml:id="formatPartitions-im1" +align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live"> +<imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="live-formatPartitions-im1" align="center" +fileref="live-formatPartitions.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="formatPartitions-pa1" revision="2">Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on +partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be preserved.</para> + + <para xml:id="formatPartitions-pa2" revision="1">Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted</para> + + <para xml:id="formatPartitions-pa3" revision="1">Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> to choose partitions you want to +check for so called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis></para> + + <tip> + <para xml:id="formatPartitions-pa4" revision="1">If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on +<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> +and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen, +where you can choose to view details of your partitions.</para> + </tip> + + <para xml:id="formatPartitions-pa5" revision="1">When you are confident about the selection, click on +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/installUpdates.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/installUpdates.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ffb6f359 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/installUpdates.xml @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns52="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="installUpdates" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="installUpdates-ti1">更新</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename--> +<!-- marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot --> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-installUpdates.png" +align="center" revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="installUpdates-pa1" revision="1">Since this version of <application>Mageia</application> was released, some +packages will have been updated or improved.</para> + + <para xml:id="installUpdates-pa2" revision="1">Choose <guilabel>Yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them, +select <guilabel>No</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you +aren't connected to the Internet</para> + + <para xml:id="installUpdates-pa3" revision="1">Press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/installer.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97ccc1ba --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,224 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="installer" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="installer-ti1">DrakX, the Mageia Installer</title> + </info> + + <para>Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia +Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as +possible.</para> + + <para>The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will +start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need.</para> + + <section> + <title>Installation Welcome Screen</title> + + <section> + <title>Using a Mageia DVD</title> + + <para>Here are the default welcome screens when using a Mageia DVD, The first one +is what you will see if you have a UEFI system, the second one is for a +Legacy system:</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>From this screen, you have access to options by pressing "<emphasis +role="bold">e</emphasis>" to enter the edit mode. To come back to this +screen, press either <emphasis role="bold">Esc</emphasis> key to quit +without saving or press the key <emphasis role="bold">Ctrl</emphasis> or +<emphasis role="bold">F10</emphasis> to quit with saving.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>From this screen, it is possible to set some preferences (note that the +options <emphasis role="bold">F1</emphasis> to <emphasis +role="bold">F6</emphasis> are available only on Legacy systems):<itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Within any of the <emphasis role="bold">F2</emphasis> to <emphasis +role="bold">F6</emphasis> options, you can view relevant help by pressing +<emphasis role="bold">F1</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Press <emphasis role="bold">F2</emphasis> to have the installer use a +specific language for the installation.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome-lang.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Use the arrow keys to select the language then press <emphasis +role="bold">Enter</emphasis>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If needed, change the screen resolution by pressing <emphasis +role="bold">F3</emphasis> (Legacy mode only).</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome5def.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If you experience problems with the installation, you could try modifying +the default settings using the <emphasis role="bold">F6</emphasis> <emphasis +role="bold">Kernel Options</emphasis> (for UEFI systems press <emphasis +role="bold">e</emphasis> instead).</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Default: It doesn't alter anything in the default options.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Safe Settings: Priority is given to the safer options at the price of a +performance detriment.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>No ACPI: (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface): Power management +features are not used.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>No Local APIC: (Local Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller): CPU +interrupt. Select this option if you experience system misbehaviour like a +kernel panic in relation to APIC.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>When you select one of these entries, it modifies the default options +displayed in the <guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line.</para> + + <note> + <para>In some Mageia releases, it may happen that the entries selected with +<emphasis role="bold">F6</emphasis> do not appear in the <guilabel>Boot +Options</guilabel> line, despite this, they will in fact be applied.</para> + </note> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome6opt.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Pressing <emphasis role="bold">F1</emphasis> opens a help window for various +boot options. Select an item with the arrow keys and press <emphasis +role="bold">Enter</emphasis> for more details or press <emphasis +role="bold">Esc</emphasis> to go back to the welcome screen.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcomeHelp1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The detailed view about the splash option. Press <emphasis +role="bold">Esc</emphasis> or select <guilabel>Return to Boot +Options</guilabel> to go back to the options list. These options can be +added by hand in the <guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcomeHelp2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>The help is translated in the chosen language with <emphasis +role="bold">F2</emphasis>.</para> + </note> + + <para>For more information about kernel options on legacy and UEFI systems, see: +<link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_set_up_kernel_options">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_set_up_kernel_options</link></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The installation steps</title> + + <para>The install process is divided into a number of steps, the status of which +is indicated in a panel to the left of the screen.</para> + + <para>Each step has one or more screens which may also have +<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> sections with extra, less commonly required, +options.</para> + + <para>Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons for further details +about the particular step.</para> + + <note> + <para>If at some points during the install you decide to stop the installation, it +is possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a +partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your +computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well +leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure +rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys +<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press +<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Installation Problems and Possible Solutions</title> + + <section> + <title>No Graphical Interface</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection +screen. This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using +low resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be +possible. In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use +this press <emphasis role="bold">Esc</emphasis> at the first welcome screen +and confirm with <emphasis role="bold">ENTER</emphasis>. You will be +presented with a black screen with the word "boot:". Type "text" and press +<emphasis role="bold">ENTER</emphasis> to continue with the installation in +text mode.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The Install Freezes</title> + + <para>If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a +problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of +hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type +<code>noauto</code> at the prompt. This option may also be combined with +other options as necessary.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>RAM problem</title> + + <para>This will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the +available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the +<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of +RAM. e.g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Dynamic partitions</title> + + <para>If you converted your hard disk from <emphasis role="bold">basic</emphasis> +format to <emphasis role="bold">dynamic</emphasis> format in Microsoft +Windows, then it is not possible to install Mageia on this disc. To revert +to a basic disk, see the Microsoft documentation: <link +ns2:href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</link>.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/login.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/login.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5ac9c3c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/login.xml @@ -0,0 +1,6 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="login" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"><info><title xml:id="label-to-adapt-ti1">Login screen</title></info><mediaobject condition="live"><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="login-im1" +fileref="live-login.png" align="center" revision="1"/></imageobject><caption><para>KDM login screen</para></caption></mediaobject><para>Finally, you will come to the login screen.</para><para>Enter your user name and user password, and in a few seconds you will find +yourself with a loaded KDE or GNOME desktop, depending on which live medium +you used. You can now start using your Mageia installation.</para><para>You can find another part of our documentation in <link +linkend="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Category:Documentation">the Mageia +wiki</link>.</para></section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/media_selection.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/media_selection.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8f7d5314 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/media_selection.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="media_selection" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="media_selection-ti1">Media Selection (Nonfree)</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- papoteur 2013-04-11 - created --> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)--> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell --> +<!--marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="media_selection-im1" +align="center" revision="1" fileref="dx2-media_selection.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are +available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories +selection determines which packages will be available for selection during +the next steps.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains +the base of the distribution.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository includes packages that are +free-of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain +closed-source software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this +repository includes nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers, +firmware for various WiFi cards, etc.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under +a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is +that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, +e.g. multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages +needed to play commercial video DVD's, etc.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/minimal-install.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/minimal-install.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3f46fc8c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/minimal-install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="minimal-install" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to + start a new page--> +<!--2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot and s/next/related/ --> +<info> + <title xml:id="minimal-install-ti1">Minimal Install</title> + </info> + + + + + + <para>You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the +Package Group Selection screen, see <xref linkend="choosePackageGroups"/>.</para> + + <para>If desired, you can additionally tick the <emphasis role="bold">Individual +package selection</emphasis> option in the same screen.</para> + + <para>Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for +<application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised +workstation. You will probably use this option combined with the <emphasis +role="bold">Individual package selection</emphasis> option mentioned above, +to fine-tune your installation, see <xref linkend="choosePackagesTree"/>.</para> + + <para>If you choose this installation method, then the relevant screen will offer +you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X.</para> + + <para>If <emphasis role="bold">With X</emphasis> is chosen, then IceWM (a +lightweight desktop environment) will also be included.</para> + + <para>The basic documentation is provided in the form of man and info pages. It +contains the man pages from the <link +xlink:href="http://www.tldp.org/manpages/man.html">Linux Documentation +Project</link> and the <link +xlink:href="http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/">GNU +coreutils</link> info pages.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="minimal-install-im1" +align="center" fileref="dx2-minimal-install.png" revision="1"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/misc-params.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/misc-params.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ec66faf9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/misc-params.xml @@ -0,0 +1,196 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="misc-params"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-ti1">Summary of miscellaneous parameters</title> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6. 20170209 updated SC--> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-summaryTop.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-pa1" revision="1">DrakX presents a proposal for the configuration of your system depending on +the choices you made and on the hardware detected. You can check the +settings here and change them if you want by pressing +<guibutton>Configure</guibutton>.</para> + + <note> + <para>As a general rule, it is recommended that you accept the default settings +unless:<itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>there are known issues with a default setting</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the default setting has already been tried and it fails</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>some other factor mentionned in the detailed sections below is an issue.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </note> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-system"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-system-ti2">System parameters</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Timezone</guilabel></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2a" revision="1">DrakX selects a time zone for you, depending on your preferred language. You +can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend="configureTimezoneUTC"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3"><guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3a" revision="1">If the selected country is wrong, it is very important that you correct the +setting. See <xref linkend="selectCountry"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4"><guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4a" revision="2">DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting.</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4b" revision="2">Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure GRUB2</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4c" revision="2">For more information, see <xref linkend="setupBootloader"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5" revision="1"><guilabel>User management</guilabel></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5a" revision="2">You can add extra users here. They will each get their own +<literal>/home</literal> directories.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6" revision="1"><guilabel>Services</guilabel>:</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6a" revision="1">System services refer to those small programs which run in the background +(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain processes.</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6b" revision="1">You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may +prevent your computer from operating correctly.</para> + + <para>For more information, see <xref linkend="configureServices"/></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-hardware"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-hardware-ti3">Hardware parameters</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1" revision="1"><guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>:</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1a" revision="1">Configure your keyboard layout according to your location, language and type +of keyboard.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you notice a wrong keyboard layout and want to change it, keep in mind +that your passwords are going to change too.</para> + </note> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2a" revision="1">Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs +etc.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3" revision="1"><guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>:</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3a" revision="1">The installer uses the default driver - if there is a default one. The +option to select a different driver is only given when there is more than +one driver for your card, but where none of them is the default one.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Graphical interface</guilabel>:</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4a" revision="1">This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays.</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4b" revision="1">For more information, see <xref linkend="configureX_chooser"/>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="summaryBottom-im1" +align="center" fileref="dx2-summaryBottom.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </section> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-network"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-network-ti4">Network and Internet parameters</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa1" revision="1"><guilabel>Network</guilabel>:</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa2" revision="1">You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free +drivers it is better to do that after reboot, using the <application>Mageia +Control Center</application>, if you have not yet enabled the Nonfree media +repositories.</para> + + <warning> + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa3" revision="1">When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to monitor +that interface as well.</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4a" revision="1">A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider +internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a +proxy service.</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4b" revision="1">You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you +need to enter here.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-security"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-security-ti5">保全</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1"><guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1a" revision="1">Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default +setting (Standard) is adequate for general use.</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1b" revision="1">Check the option which best suits your usage.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2a">A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the +rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it.</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2b" revision="1">Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your +selections will depend on what you use your computer for. For more +information, see <xref linkend="firewall"/>.</para> + + <warning> + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2c" revision="1">Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky.</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/reboot.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/reboot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bc455c04 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/reboot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="reboot"> + <!--Lebarhon 20170210 updated for Mageia6--> +<info> + <title xml:id="reboot-ti1">重新開機</title> + </info> + + <para>Once the bootloader has been installed, you will be prompted to halt your +computer, remove the live CD and restart the computer, click on <emphasis +role="bold"><guibutton>Finish</guibutton></emphasis> and act as +asked<emphasis role="bold"> in this order!</emphasis></para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-reboot2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>When you restart, you will see a succession of download progress bars. These +indicate that the software media lists are being downloaded (see Software +management).</para> + <mediaobject condition="live"> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="reboot-im1" +fileref="live-reboot.png" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/resizeFATChoose.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/resizeFATChoose.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5fcc2cc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/resizeFATChoose.xml @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="resizeFATChoose"> + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 31 --> +<!--2013-12-01 re-adding this file to software/i18n/tools/docs/installer/en + in git, in case the related screen gets restored in drakx-installer-stage2--> +<title xml:id="resizeFATChoose-ti1">Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> +partition</title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa1">You have more than one +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition. +Choose which one should be made smaller to make space for installing +<application>Mageia</application>.</para> + + + +<!--<para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa2"> +.......</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa3">........</para>--> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/securityLevel.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/securityLevel.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c6828a4d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/securityLevel.xml @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="securityLevel"> + <info> + <title xml:id="securityLevel-ti1">安全層級</title> + </info> + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot --> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="securityLevel-im1" +align="center" fileref="dx2-securityLevel.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Please choose the desired security level</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="securityLevel-pa1" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Standard</emphasis> is the default, and recommended +setting for the average user. The <emphasis role="bold">Secure</emphasis> +setting will create a highly protected system - for instance if the system +is to be used as a public server.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Security Administrator</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="securityLevel-pa2" revision="1">This item allows you to configure an email address to which the system will +send <emphasis>security alert messages</emphasis> when it detects situations +which require notification to a system administrator.</para> + + <para>A good, and easy-to-implement, choice is to enter <user>@localhost - +where <user> is the login name of the user to receive these messages.</para> + + <note> + <para>The system sends such messages as <emphasis role="bold">Unix Mailspool +messages</emphasis>, not as "ordinary" SMTP mail: this user must therefore +be configured for receiving such mail!</para> + </note> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="securityLevel-pa3">After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings +in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> section of the Mageia Control Center.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectCountry.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectCountry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ac1623fe --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectCountry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectCountry" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="selectCountry-ti1">Select your Country / Region</title> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="selectCountry-im1" +align="center" fileref="dx2-selectCountry.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectCountry-pa1">Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, +like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country +can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa2">If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other +Countries</guilabel> option and choose your country / region there.</para> + + <note> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa3">If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list, +after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem that a country from the +first list was chosen. Please ignore this, as DrakX will apply your actual +choice.</para> + </note> + + <section xml:id="inputMethod"> + <info> + <title xml:id="inputMethod-ti7">Input method</title> + </info> + + <para xml:id="selectCountry-pa4" revision="1">In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an +input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input +multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the +default input method, so users should not need to configure it +manually. Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar +functions and can be installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package +selection.</para> + + <note> + <para xml:id="selectCountry-pa5" revision="1">If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it +after you boot your installed system via <emphasis role="bold">Configure +your Computer</emphasis> -> <emphasis role="bold">System</emphasis>, or by +running localedrake as root.</para> + </note> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectInstallClass.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b27bce11 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectInstallClass.xml @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="selectInstallClass"> + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 --> +<!-- 20120405 updated JohnR --> +<!-- enhanced xml code for screenshot, removed para xml:id's, changed "you'll" to + "you will" and "don't" to "do not" and a passive to an active tense, marja, 20120409--> +<!-- barjac 2012-04-10 In the spirit of KISS reverted to my initial basic version --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja, corrected typo in screenshot name, removed --> +<title xml:id="selectInstallClass-ti1">Install or Upgrade</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" align="center" +fileref="dx2-selectInstallClass.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>安裝</para> + + <para>Use this option to perform a fresh installation of +<application>Mageia</application>. This will format the root partition (/), +but can preserve a separated /home partition.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Upgrade</para> + + <para>This can be used to upgrade an existing installation of +<application>Mageia</application>.</para> + + <warning> + <para>Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still +supported</emphasis> when this installer's version was released, has been +thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that has reached +its End Of Life, then it is better to do a clean install instead while +preserving your <literal>/home</literal> partition.</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <note> + <para>If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to +reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been +formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in +the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an +unusable system. If in spite of that, and only if you are very sure +rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing <guilabel>Alt +Ctrl F2</guilabel> simultaneously. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl +Delete</guilabel> simultaneously to reboot.</para> + </note> + + <tip> + <para>If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you +can return from the <emphasis role="bold">Install or Upgrade</emphasis> +screen to the language choice screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl +Home</guilabel> simultaneously. <emphasis role="bold">Do not</emphasis> do +this later in the install.</para> + </tip> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectKeyboard.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9344ef32 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectKeyboard.xml @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectKeyboard" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + + + + + <info> + <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<title xml:id="selectKeyboard-ti1">鍵盤</title> + </info> + + <para xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa1" revision="1">DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable +keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectKeyboard.png" align="center"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa2" revision="1">Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard +layout. If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the +specifications that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There +may even be a label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also +look here: <link +xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa3" revision="1">If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on +<guibutton>More</guibutton> to get a fuller list, and select your keyboard +there.</para> + + <para revision="1"><warning> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa5">After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog, +you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though +a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this and +continue the installation: the keyboard chosen from the full list will be +applied.</para> + </warning></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa4" revision="1">If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an +extra dialogue screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the +Latin and non-Latin keyboard layouts</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectKeyboardLive.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectKeyboardLive.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ac981ca3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectKeyboardLive.xml @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="selectKeyboardLive"> + <info> + <title xml:id="selectKeyboardLive-ti1">Select keyboard</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="selectKeyboardLive-im1" revision="1" +align="center" format="PNG" fileref="live-selectKeyboard.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>You will be required to set the keyboard layout you wish to use in +Mageia. The default one is selected according to your language and +timezone previously selected.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectLanguage.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8bc8fec0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectLanguage.xml @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="selectLanguage"> + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 01, using barjac's text --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has had a look --> +<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, corrected wrong + code in figure, marja, 20120409 --> +<!-- barjac 2012-04-11 - removed image figure tag - and once again had to clean + up mess made of this header by xxe --> +<title xml:id="selectLanguage-ti1">請選擇要使用那個語言。</title> + </info> + + <para condition="classical">Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your +continent. <application>Mageia</application> will use this selection during +the installation and for your installed system.</para> + + <para condition="live">Select your preferred language. <application>Mageia</application> will use +this selection during the installation and for your installed system.</para> + + <para condition="classical">If it is likely that you (or others) will require several languages to be +installed on your system, then you should use the <guibutton>Multiple +languages</guibutton> option to add them now. It will be difficult to add +extra language support after installation.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG" +fileref="dx2-selectLanguage.png" align="center"/> </imageobject> +<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata fileref="live-language.png" +format=""/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <warning condition="classical"> + <para>Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one as your +preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be marked as +chosen in the multiple languages screen.</para> + </warning> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem condition="classical"> + <para>If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then +it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default.</para> + + <para condition="classical">This may be disabled in the <emphasis role="bold">Multiple +languages</emphasis> screen if you know that it is inappropriate for your +language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed languages.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia +Control Center -> System -> Manage localization for your system.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectMouse.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectMouse.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..74535a89 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/selectMouse.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectMouse" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="selectMouse-ti1">Select mouse</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 11 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place--> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot --> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectMouse.png" align="center" +format="PNG" > </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa1">If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a +different one here.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa2">Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB +mice</guilabel> is a good choice.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa3">Select <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> to +configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/setupBootloader.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..407d76bd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/setupBootloader.xml @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="setupBootloader"> + + + <info> + <!----> +<!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page + +Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6. 20170209 updated SC--> +<title xml:id="setupBootloader-ti1">開機載入程式主要選項</title> + </info> + <section> + <title>Bootloader interface</title> + <para>By default, Mageia uses exclusively:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>GRUB2 (with or without graphical menu) for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>GRUB2-efi for a UEFI system.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <tip> + <para>The Mageia graphical menus are nice :)</para> + </tip> + <section> + <title>GRUB2 on Legacy/MBR and Legacy/GPT systems</title> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata +fileref="dx2-setupBootloader.png" align="center"/> </imageobject> +<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata xml:id="setupBootloader-im1" +fileref="live-setupBootloader.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>Don't modify the <emphasis role="bold">Boot Device</emphasis> unless you +really know what you are doing.</para> + </section> + <section> + <title>GRUB2-efi on UEFI systems</title> + <para>With a UEFI system, the user interface is slightly different as you cannot +choose between the <emphasis role="bold">with</emphasis> or <emphasis +role="bold">without graphical menu</emphasis> options.</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata +fileref="dx2-setupBootloader2.png" align="center"/> </imageobject> +<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata +fileref="live-setupBootloader2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>If Mageia is the only system installed on your computer, the installer +created an ESP (EFI System Partition) to house the bootloader +(GRUB2-efi). If there are already UEFI operating systems installed on your +computer (Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer detects the existing +ESP created by Windows and adds GRUB2-efi. Although it is possible to have +several ESPs, only one is required (and advised), whatever the number of +operating systems you have.</para> + <para>Don't modify the <emphasis role="bold">Boot Device</emphasis> unless you +really know what you are doing.</para> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <title xml:id="setupMageiaBootloader">Using a Mageia bootloader</title> + <para>By default, and according to your system, Mageia writes one of the +following:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>a GRUB2 bootloader either into the MBR (Master Boot Record) of your first +hard drive or in the BIOS boot partition.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>a GRUB2-efi bootloader into the ESP</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <para>If you already have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to +add them to your new Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, +click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> and then untick the <emphasis +role="bold">Probe Foreign OS</emphasis> option.</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-setupBootloader3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata fileref="live-setupBootloader3.png" +align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </section> + <section> + <title>Using an existing bootloader</title> + <para>The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader +is beyond the scope of this documentation, however in most cases it will +involve running the relevant bootloader installation program which should +detect and add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating +system in question.</para> + </section> + <section> + <title xml:id="setupChainLoading">Using chain loading</title> + <para>If you don't want a bootable Mageia, but to chain-load it from another OS, +click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton>, then on +<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and tick the box <guilabel>Do not touch ESP +or MBR</guilabel>.</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata +fileref="dx2-setupBootloader4.png" align="center"/> </imageobject> +<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata +fileref="live-setupBootloader4.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>You will get a warning that the bootloader is missing, ignore it by clicking +<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-setupBootloader5.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + </section> + <section> + <title>選項</title> + <section> + <title>First page</title> + <para><itemizedlist><listitem><para><guilabel>Delay before booting the default image</guilabel>: This lets you +set a delay in seconds before the default operating system is started up.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Security</guilabel>: This allows you to set a password for the +bootloader. This means a username and password will be required when booting +to select a booting entry or change settings. The username is <emphasis +role="bold">root</emphasis> and the password is the one chosen here-after.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Password</guilabel>: Choose a password for the bootloader.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the password and DrakX will +check that it matches with the one above.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Advanced</guilabel></para><itemizedlist><listitem><para><guilabel>Enable ACPI:</guilabel> ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power +Interface) is a standard for power management. It can save energy by +stopping unused devices. Deselecting it could be useful if, for example, +your computer does not support ACPI or if you think the ACPI implementation +might cause some problems (for instance random reboots or system lockups).</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Enable SMP</guilabel>: This option enables/disables symmetric +multiprocessing for multi core processors.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Enable APIC</guilabel>: This gives the operating system access to +the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. APIC devices permit more +complex priority models, and Advanced IRQ (Interrupt Request) management.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Enable Local APIC</guilabel>: Local APIC manages all external +interrupts for a specific processor in an SMP system.</para></listitem></itemizedlist></listitem></itemizedlist></para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Next page</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Default:</guilabel> Operating system started up by default</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Append:</guilabel> This option lets you pass the kernel +information or tell the kernel to give you more information as it boots.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Probe foreign OS</guilabel>: see above <link +linkend="setupMageiaBootloader">Using a Mageia bootloader</link></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Advanced</guilabel><itemizedlist><listitem><para><guilabel>Video mode:</guilabel> This sets the screen size and colour depth +to be used by the boot menu. If you click the down triangle you will be +offered other size and colour depth options.</para></listitem><listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Do not touch ESP or MBR</emphasis>: see above <link +linkend="setupChainLoading">Using the chain loading</link></para></listitem></itemizedlist></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bdf0d47d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry"> + + + <info> + <!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page + +Lebarhon 2016 12 16 Updated for Mageia 6--> +<title xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-ti1">Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry</title> + </info> + + <para>To do this you need to manually edit /boot/grub2/custom.cfg or use the +software <emphasis role="bold">grub-customizer</emphasis> tool instead +(available in the Mageia repositories).</para> + + <note> + <para>For more information, see: <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</link></para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/setupSCSI.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..74fa2e1d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/setupSCSI.xml @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="setupSCSI" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="setupSCSI-ti1">Setup SCSI</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 02 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 --> +<!-- SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) --> +<!-- barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the + Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file --> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-setupSCSI.png" +align="center" xml:id="setupSCSI-im1" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="3.1" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa1">DrakX will normally detect hard disks correctly. However, with some older +SCSI controllers it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use +and subsequently fail to recognise the drive.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa2">If this happens, you will need to manually tell DrakX which SCSI drive(s) +you have.</para> + + <para xml:id="setupSCSI-pa3" revision="3">DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/soundConfig.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/soundConfig.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..27db0f24 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/soundConfig.xml @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="soundConfig" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="soundConfig-ti1">聲音設定</title> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-soundConfig.png" +xml:id="soundConfig-im1" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen the name of the driver that the installer chose for your +sound card is given, which will be the default driver if one exists.</para> + + <para>The default driver should work without problems. However, if after install +you do encounter problems, then run <command>draksound</command> or start +this tool via MCC (Mageia Control Center), by choosing the +<guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> tab and clicking on <guilabel>Sound +Configuration</guilabel> at the top right of the screen.</para> + + <para>Then, in the <emphasis role="bold">draksound</emphasis> or <emphasis +role="bold">Sound Configuration</emphasis> tool screen, click on +<guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> to find useful advice about how to +solve the problem.</para> + + <section xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced"> + <info> + <title xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced-ti1">進階</title> + </info> + + <para>Clicking <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Advanced</guibutton></emphasis> in +this screen, during install, is useful if there is no default driver and +there are several drivers available, but you think the installer selected +the wrong one.</para> + + <para>In that case you can select a different driver after clicking on <emphasis +role="bold"><guibutton>Let me pick any driver</guibutton></emphasis>.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/takeOverHdConfirm.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cea01ad3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/takeOverHdConfirm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-ti1">Confirm hard disk to be formatted</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 03 --> +<!-- test comment - johnr --> +<!-- 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct + hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I + saw this help screen when I had only one HD --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot --> +<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata format="PNG" +fileref="live-takeOverHdConfirm.png" align="center"/> </imageobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG" +fileref="dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1" revision="1">Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are at all unsure about your +choice.</para> + + <para xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2" revision="1">Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to proceed if you are sure that it is +ok to erase every partition, every operating system and all data that might +be on that hard disk.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/testing.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/testing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6ed6a40b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/testing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="testing" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="testing-ti1">Testing Mageia as Live system</title> + </info> + + <section xml:id="testing-1"> + <info> + <title xml:id="testing1-ti1">Live mode</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-liveMode.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>You get this screen if you selected "Boot Mageia". If not, you get the +"<link linkend="doPartitionDisks">Partitioning</link> step"</para> + + <section> + <info> + <title xml:id="testing2-ti1">Testing hardware</title> + </info> + + <para>One of the Live mode goals is to test if the hardware is correctly managed +by Mageia. You can check if all devices have a driver in the Hardware +section of the Mageia Control Center. You can test the most current devices:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>network interface: configure it with net_applet</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>graphical card: if you see the previous screen, it's already OK.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>webcam:</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>sound: a jingle has already been played</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>printer: configure it and print a test page</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>scanner: scan a document from ...</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>If all is OK for you, you can process to the installation. If not, you can +leave with the quit button.</para> + + <remark>The configuration settings you made here are kept for the installation.</remark> + </section> + + <section> + <info> + <title xml:id="testing3-ti1">Launch installation</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-liveMode-install.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>To launch the installation of Mageia LiveCD or Live DVD to the hard disc or +SSD drive, simply click on the icon "Install on Hard Disk". You will get +this screen, and then the "<link +linkend="doPartitionDisks">Partitioning</link> step" as for the direct +installation.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/uninstall-Mageia.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/uninstall-Mageia.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c1bba283 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/uninstall-Mageia.xml @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="uninstall-Mageia" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <!--Lebarhon 2015-07-06 Not true with UEFI +Lebarhon 2016 12 16 this page should be deleted or rewritten.--> +<info> + <title xml:id="uninstall-Mageia-ti1">Uninstalling Mageia</title> + </info> + + + + <para>If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly - in short +you want get rid of it - that is your right and Mageia also gives you the +possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system.</para> + + <para>After your data backup, reboot your Mageia installation DVD and select +<emphasis role="bold">Rescue system</emphasis>, then, <emphasis +role="bold">Restore Windows boot loader</emphasis>. At the next boot, you +will only have Windows, with no option to choose your operating system.</para> + + <para>In Windows to recover the space used by Mageia partitions: click on +<code>Start -> Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Computer Management +-> Storage -> Disk Management</code>. You will recognize a Mageia partition +because they are labeled <guilabel>Unknown</guilabel>, and also by their +size and place on the disk. Right click on each of these partitions and +select <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> to free up the space.</para> + + <para>If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it +(FAT32 or NTFS). It will get a partition letter.</para> + + <para>If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the +existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other +partitioning tools that can be used, such as <emphasis +role="bold">gparted</emphasis>, available for both Windows and Linux. As +always, when changing partitions, be very careful to back up anything +important to you.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/unused.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/unused.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..06af4648 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/zh_TW/unused.xml @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="unused" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="unused-ti1">Keep or delete unused material</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject condition="live"> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-unused.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="unused-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In this step, the installer looks for unused locales packages and unused +hardware packages. Then it proposes you to delete them. It is a good idea to +accept, except if you prepare an installation which has to run on different +hardware.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../live-unused-InstallationProgress.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The next step is the copying of files on hard disk. This takes some +minutes. At the end, you get a blank screen for some time, it's normal.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW.po b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW.po new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d6137e1f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW.po @@ -0,0 +1,9596 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE +# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Control Center Help package. +# +# Translators: +# Cheng-Chia Tseng <pswo10680@gmail.com>, 2018 +# You-Cheng Hsieh <yochenhsieh@gmail.com>, 2018 +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-07-10 09:53+0300\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-12-10 05:47+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: You-Cheng Hsieh <yochenhsieh@gmail.com>\n" +"Language-Team: Chinese (Taiwan) (http://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/mageia/" +"language/zh_TW/)\n" +"Language: zh_TW\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:11 +msgid "Access WebDAV shared drives and directories" +msgstr "存取 WebDAV 分享的磁碟機與目錄" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:14 +msgid "diskdrake --dav" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:19 +msgid "diskdrake--dav1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia " +"Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure " +"WebDAV shares</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:30 en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:22 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:21 +#: en/drak3d.xml:15 en/drakconnect.xml:16 en/draknetcenter.xml:29 +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:18 en/draksambashare.xml:18 en/drakvpn.xml:16 +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:27 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:41 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:27 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:46 +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:17 en/system-config-printer.xml:21 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "前言" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV\">WebDAV</link> is a " +"protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it " +"appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a " +"WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV " +"server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:40 +msgid "Creating a new entry" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:42 +msgid "" +"The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if " +"any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new entry. " +"Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:46 +msgid "" +"Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions. Continue " +"with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking " +"<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the " +"<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct " +"it, if needed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:54 +msgid "diskdrake--dav3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:58 +msgid "" +"The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount " +"point." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:61 +msgid "" +"In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other " +"options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:67 +msgid "diskdrake--dav4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:71 +msgid "" +"The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the " +"access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:74 +msgid "" +"After you accepted the configuration with the radio button <guibutton>Done</" +"guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and your new mount point is " +"listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you are asked whether " +"or not to save the modifications in <emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose " +"this option if you want that the remote directory is available at each boot. " +"If your configuration is for one-time usage, do not save it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:3 +msgid "Share your hard disk partitions" +msgstr "分享您的硬碟分割區" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:6 +msgid "diskdrake --fileshare" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:11 +msgid "diskdrake--fileshare.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This simple tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you, the " +"administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home " +"subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have " +"computers running either Linux or Windows operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:20 +msgid "" +"It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab, labelled " +"\"Share your hard disk partitions\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:23 +msgid "" +"First, answer the question : \"<guilabel>Would you like to allow users to " +"share some of their directories ?</guilabel>\", click on <guibutton>No " +"sharing</guibutton> if the answer is no for all users, click on " +"<guibutton>Allow all users</guibutton> for all users and click on " +"<guibutton>Custom</guibutton> if the answer is no for some users and yes for " +"the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their " +"directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically " +"created by the system. You will be asked about this later." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Click on <guilabel>OK</guilabel>, a second screen appears which asks you " +"choose between <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> or <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. " +"Check <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> if Linux is the only operating system on " +"the network, check <guibutton>SMB</guibutton> if the network includes both " +"Linux and Windows machines and then click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Any " +"required packages will be installed if necessary." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:39 +msgid "" +"The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen. In " +"this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool allows " +"you to add users authorised to share their directories to the fileshare " +"group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare group, " +"then on <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>, In the Groups tab. Check the " +"fileshare group and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. For more information " +"about Userdrake, see <xref linkend=\"userdrake\">this page</xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:50 +msgid "" +"When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to disconnect and " +"reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken into account." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:55 +msgid "" +"From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in his/her " +"file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file managers " +"have this facility." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:1 en/MCC-cover.xml:9 en/mcc-network.xml:1 en/MCC.xml:1 +#: en/software-management.xml:2 en/transfugdrake.xml:1 +msgid "en" +msgstr "zh_TW" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:3 +msgid "Access NFS shared drives and directories" +msgstr "存取 NFS 分享的磁碟機與目錄" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:6 +msgid "diskdrake --nfs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:11 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:17 +msgid "." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:25 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare " +"some shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The " +"protocol used for this is NFS which is available on most Linux or Unix " +"systems. The shared directory will be thus available directly at boot. " +"Shared directories can be also accessible directly in a single session for a " +"user with tools such as file browsers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:36 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:38 +msgid "Procedure" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers " +"which share directories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the " +"shared directories and select the directory you want to access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:47 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:51 +msgid "" +"The button <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> will be available and you have " +"to specify where to mount the directory." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:56 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:60 +msgid "" +"After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also verify and " +"change some options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button. After " +"mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:67 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:73 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:77 +msgid "" +"On accepting the configuration with the <guibutton>Done</guibutton> button, " +"a message will displayed, asking \"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab " +"modifications\". This will make the directory available at each boot, if the " +"network is accessible. The new directory is then available in your file " +"browser, for example in Dolphin." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:85 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:3 +msgid "CD/DVD burner" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:5 +msgid "diskdrake --removable" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:10 +msgid "diskdrake--removable.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>is found under the tab " +"Local disks in the Mageia Control Center labelled accordingly with your " +"removable hardware (CD/DVD players and burners and floppy drives only)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:20 +msgid "Its goal is to define the way your removable disk is mounted." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:22 +msgid "" +"At the top of the window there is a short description of your hardware and " +"the chosen options to mount it. Use the menu on the bottom to change them. " +"Check the item to be changed and then on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> " +"button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:28 +msgid "Mount point" +msgstr "掛載點" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:30 +msgid "" +"Check this box to change the mount point. The default one is /media/cdrom." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><bridgehead> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:37 en/harddrake2.xml:66 +msgid "Options" +msgstr "選項" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Many mount options can be chosen here either directly in the list or via the " +"<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> submenu. The main are:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:45 +msgid "user/nouser" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:47 +msgid "" +"user allows an ordinary user (not root) to mount the removable disk, this " +"option involves noexec, nosuid and nodev. The user who mounted the disk is " +"the only one who can umount it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:11 +msgid "Access Windows (SMB) shared drives and directories" +msgstr "設定 Windows (SMB) 分享磁碟機與目錄" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:14 +msgid "diskdrake --smb" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:23 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare " +"which shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The " +"protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R) " +"systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared " +"directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with " +"tools such as file browsers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of " +"available servers, for example with <xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:40 +msgid "" +"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers who " +"share directories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:43 +msgid "" +"Click on the server name and on > before the server name to display the " +"list of the shared directories and select the directory you want to access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:47 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> button will become available, you " +"have to specify where to mount the directory." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:52 +msgid "diskdrake--smb2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:56 +msgid "" +"After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the <guimenu>Mount " +"button</guimenu>. You can also verify and change some options with the " +"<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:60 +msgid "" +"In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those able to " +"connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it " +"with the same button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:66 +msgid "diskdrake--smb3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:72 +msgid "diskdrake--smb4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:76 +msgid "" +"After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will ask " +"\"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications\". Saving, will allow " +"directory to made available at each boot, if the network is accessible. The " +"new directory is then available in your file browser, for example in dolphin." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:84 +msgid "diskdrake--smb5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:3 +msgid "3D Desktop Effects" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drak3d.xml:5 +msgid "drak3d" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drak3d.xml:10 +msgid "drak3d.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:18 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drak3d</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:17 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> lets you manage the 3D " +"desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by " +"default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:25 +msgid "Getting Started" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:27 +msgid "" +"To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If the " +"package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d can " +"start." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:31 +msgid "" +"After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window. Here you " +"can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or " +"<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a composite/" +"window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special effects for your " +"desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn it on." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:38 +msgid "" +"If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of " +"Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be " +"installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the <guibutton>Ok</" +"guibutton> button to continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drak3d.xml:45 +msgid "drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:49 +msgid "" +"Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that Compiz " +"Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log back in " +"for the changes to take effect." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:53 +msgid "" +"After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure Compiz " +"Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager) tool." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:59 +msgid "Troubleshooting" +msgstr "解決問題" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:62 +msgid "Can't See Desktop after Logging in" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:64 +msgid "" +"If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into your desktop " +"but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back to the log in " +"screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select drak3d." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drak3d.xml:71 +msgid "drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:75 +msgid "" +"When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator, you will be " +"prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the administrator login " +"with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes that may have caused the " +"log in problem." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakauth.xml:9 +msgid "Authentication" +msgstr "認證方式" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakauth.xml:11 +msgid "drakauth" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakauth.xml:16 +msgid "drakauth.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakauth.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakauth</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakauth.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> enables you to modify the " +"manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakauth.xml:25 +msgid "" +"By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your " +"computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so " +"and give information about that." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:3 +msgid "Set up autologin to automatically log in" +msgstr "設定自動登入" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:6 +msgid "drakautologin" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:11 +msgid "drakautologin.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakautologin</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to " +"automatically login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without " +"asking for any password. It's called autologin. This is generally a good " +"idea when there is only one user like to be using the machine." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:22 +msgid "" +"It is found under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot</emphasis> tab in the " +"Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up autologin to automatically log in\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:26 +msgid "The interface buttons are pretty obvious:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:28 +msgid "" +"Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system starts</" +"guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the boot. If " +"not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be possible " +"to launch the graphic interface manually. This can be done by launching the " +"command 'startx' or 'systemctl start dm'." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:34 +msgid "" +"If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either " +"<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to " +"continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check " +"<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if " +"needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default " +"username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakboot.xml:3 +msgid "Set up boot system" +msgstr "設定系統開機" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakboot.xml:5 +msgid "drakboot" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:10 +msgid "drakboot--boot.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:14 +msgid "" +"If you are using a UEFI system instead of BIOS, the user interface is " +"slightly different as the boot device is obviously the EFI system Partition " +"(ESP)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:20 +msgid "drakboot--boot2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:25 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakboot</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure " +"the boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default " +"boot, etc.)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:29 +msgid "" +"It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled \"Set up " +"boot system\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing. Changing " +"some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:38 +msgid "" +"In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible if " +"using BIOS, to choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub, " +"Grub2 or Lilo, and with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question " +"of taste, there are no other consequences. You can also set the " +"<guibutton>Boot device</guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you " +"are an expert. The boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any " +"modification can prevent your machine from booting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:46 +msgid "" +"In a UEFI system, the bootloader is <guilabel>Grub2-efi</guilabel> and is " +"installed in /boot/EFI partition. This FAT32 formatted partition is common " +"to all operating systems installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:50 +msgid "" +"In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set " +"the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in seconds. " +"During this delay, Grub or Lilo will display the list of available operating " +"systems, prompting you to make your choice. If no selection is made, the " +"bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:57 +msgid "" +"In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is " +"possible to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username and " +"password will be asked at the boot time to select a booting entry or change " +"settings. The username is \"root\" and the password is the one chosen here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:63 +msgid "The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:66 +msgid "<guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:68 +msgid "" +"ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the " +"power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was " +"the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI " +"compatible." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:73 +msgid "<guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:75 +msgid "" +"SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for " +"multicore processors." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:79 +msgid "" +"If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual " +"processor and enable SMP." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:83 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local APIC:</" +"guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:86 +msgid "" +"APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two " +"components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O " +"APIC. The latter one routes the interrupts it receives from peripheral buses " +"to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful " +"for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC " +"system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message " +"\"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7\"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local " +"APIC." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:97 +msgid "drakboot1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:101 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen differs depending on which boot " +"loader you chose." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:106 +msgid "You have Grub Legacy or Lilo:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:108 +msgid "" +"In this case, you can see the list of all the available entries at boot " +"time. The default one is asterisked. To change the order of the menu " +"entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the selected item. If you " +"click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> " +"buttons, a new window appears to add a new entry in the bootloader menu or " +"to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar with Lilo or Grub to be " +"able to use these tools." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:118 +msgid "drakboot2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:122 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want " +"to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command \"title\". For " +"example: Mageia3." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:126 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches " +"the Grub command \"kernel\". For example /boot/vmlinuz." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:129 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the " +"kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command \"root\". For example (hd0,1)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:133 en/drakboot.xml:160 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to " +"the kernel at boot time." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:136 +msgid "" +"If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this " +"entry by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:139 +msgid "" +"In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to " +"choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel> " +"file and a <guilabel>network profile</guilabel>, see <xref linkend=" +"\"draknetprofile\"/>, in the drop-down lists." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:147 +msgid "" +"You have Grub2 or Grub2-efi (boot loaders used by default respectively in " +"Legacy mode and UEFI mode):" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:150 +msgid "" +"In this case, the drop-down list labelled <guilabel>Default</guilabel> " +"displays all the available entries; click on the one wanted as the default " +"one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:156 +msgid "drakboot3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:163 +msgid "" +"If you have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them " +"to your Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, uncheck the box " +"<guilabel>Probe Foreign OS</guilabel>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:167 +msgid "" +"In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to " +"choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>. If you don't want a bootable " +"Mageia, but to chain load it from another OS, check the box <guilabel>Do not " +"touch ESP or MBR</guilabel> and accept the warning." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:175 +msgid "drakboot6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:180 +msgid "" +"Not installing on ESP or MBR means that the installation is not bootable " +"unless chain loaded from another OS." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:184 +msgid "" +"To set many other parameters, you can use the tool named <emphasis>Grub " +"Customizer</emphasis>, available in the Mageia repositories (see below)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:190 +msgid "drakboot4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:11 +msgid "Collect Logs and System Information for Bug Reports" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:12 +msgid "drakbug_report" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakbug_report</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and " +"used on the command line." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:20 +msgid "" +"It is advised to write the output of this command to a file, for instance by " +"doing <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakbug_report > drakbugreport.txt</emphasis>, " +"but make sure you have enough disk space first: the file can easily be " +"several GBs large." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:24 +msgid "" +"The output is far too large to attach to a bug report without first removing " +"the unneeded parts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:26 +msgid "This command collects the following information on your system:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:29 +msgid "lspci" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:30 +msgid "pci_devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:31 +msgid "dmidecode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:32 +msgid "fdisk" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:33 +msgid "scsi" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:34 +msgid "/sys/bus/scsi/devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:35 +msgid "lsmod" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:36 +msgid "cmdline" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:37 +msgid "pcmcia: stab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:38 +msgid "usb" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:39 +msgid "partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:40 +msgid "cpuinfo" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:41 +msgid "syslog" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:42 +msgid "Xorg.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:43 +msgid "monitor_full_edid" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:44 +msgid "stage1.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:45 +msgid "ddebug.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:46 +msgid "install.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:47 +msgid "fstab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:48 +msgid "modprobe.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:49 +msgid "lilo.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:50 +msgid "grub: menu.lst" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:51 +msgid "grub: install.sh" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:52 +msgid "grub: device.map" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:53 +msgid "xorg.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:54 +msgid "urpmi.cfg" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:55 +msgid "modprobe.preload" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:56 +msgid "sysconfig/i18n" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:57 +msgid "/proc/iomem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:58 +msgid "/proc/ioport" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:59 +msgid "mageia version" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:60 +msgid "rpm -qa" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:61 +msgid "df" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:65 +msgid "" +"At the time this help page was written, the \"syslog\" part of this " +"command's output was empty, because this tool had not yet been adjusted to " +"our switch to systemd. If it is still empty, you can retrieve the \"syslog\" " +"by doing (as root) <emphasis role=\"bold\"> journalctl -a > journalctl.txt</" +"emphasis>. If you don't have a lot of diskspace, you can, for instance, take " +"the last 5000 lines of the log instead with: <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">journalctl -a | tail -n5000 > journalctl5000.txt</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakbug.xml:9 +msgid "Mageia Bug Report Tool" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakbug.xml:9 +msgid "drakbug" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakbug.xml:15 +msgid "drakbug.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:19 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakbug</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:19 +msgid "" +"Usually, this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> starts " +"automatically when a Mageia tool crashes. However, it is also possible that, " +"after filing a bug report, you are asked to start this tool to check some of " +"the information it gives, and then provide that in that existing bug report." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:21 +msgid "" +"If a new bug report needs to be filed and you are not used to doing that, " +"then please read <link xlink:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/" +"How_to_report_a_bug_properly\">How to report a bug report properly</link> " +"before clicking on the \"Report\" button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:23 +msgid "" +"In case the bug has already been filed by someone else (the error message " +"that drakbug gave will be the same, then), it is useful to add a comment to " +"that existing report that you saw the bug, too." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakclock.xml:3 +msgid "Manage date and time" +msgstr "管理日期與時間" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakclock.xml:5 +msgid "drakclock" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakclock.xml:10 +msgid "drakclock.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakclock</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the tab " +"System in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>\"Manage date and time" +"\"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a right " +"click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:21 +msgid "It's a very simple tool." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:23 +msgid "" +"On the upper left part, is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">calendar</emphasis>. " +"On the screenshot above, the date is September (on the upper left), 2012 (on " +"the upper right), the 2nd (in blue) and it is a Sunday. Select the month " +"(or year) by clicking on the little arrows on each side of September (or " +"2012). Select the day by clicking on its number." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:29 +msgid "" +"On the bottom left is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Network Time Protocol</" +"emphasis> synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on time by " +"synchronising it with a server. Check <guilabel>Enable Network Time " +"Protocol</guilabel> and choose the closest server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:34 +msgid "" +"On the right part is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">clock</emphasis>. It's " +"useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours, " +"minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows " +"to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see " +"your desktop environment settings for that." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:40 +msgid "" +"At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on the " +"<guibutton>Change Time Zone</guibutton> button and choosing in the list the " +"nearest town." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they " +"will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation " +"settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3 +msgid "Remove a connection" +msgstr "移除一連線" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3 +msgid "drakconnect --del" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:8 +msgid "drakconnect--del.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakconnect --del</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12 +msgid "" +"Here, you can delete a network interface<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=" +"\"0\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:14 +msgid "" +"Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then " +"click <emphasis>next</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted " +"successfully." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:3 +msgid "Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)" +msgstr "設定一個新的網路介面 (LAN、ISDN、ADSL、...)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:6 +msgid "drakconnect" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:11 +msgid "drakconnect.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:19 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakconnect</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:18 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure much " +"of local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from " +"your access provider or your network administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which hardware " +"and provider you have." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:30 +msgid "A new Wired connection (Ethernet)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:34 en/drakconnect.xml:162 +msgid "" +"The first window lists the interfaces which are available. Select the one " +"to configure." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:39 en/drakconnect.xml:167 +msgid "" +"At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP " +"address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:44 en/drakconnect.xml:187 en/drakconnect.xml:557 +msgid "Automatic IP" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:48 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers " +"are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained " +"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The " +"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, " +"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. " +"The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option " +"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers " +"have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address " +"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:62 +msgid "drakconnect5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:68 en/drakconnect.xml:205 en/drakconnect.xml:572 +msgid "The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:72 en/drakconnect.xml:209 en/drakconnect.xml:576 +msgid "Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:77 en/drakconnect.xml:214 en/drakconnect.xml:581 +msgid "the DHCP client" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:81 en/drakconnect.xml:218 en/drakconnect.xml:585 +msgid "DHCP timeout" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:85 en/drakconnect.xml:222 +msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:90 en/drakconnect.xml:227 en/drakconnect.xml:594 +msgid "Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:95 en/drakconnect.xml:232 en/drakconnect.xml:599 +msgid "" +"the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server " +"requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP address. " +"This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:104 en/drakconnect.xml:241 +msgid "" +"After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection " +"configurations are explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:111 en/drakconnect.xml:248 en/drakconnect.xml:615 +msgid "Manual configuration" +msgstr "手動組態設定" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:115 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS " +"servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no " +"HOSTNAME is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is " +"attributed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:121 en/drakconnect.xml:258 +msgid "" +"For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like " +"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is <emphasis>255.255.255.0</" +"emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are available from your service " +"provider's website." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:126 +msgid "" +"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</" +"emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your computer is " +"called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is \"splash.boatanchor.net\", " +"the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". Unless you specifically need " +"it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, domestic ADSL would not need " +"this setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:136 +msgid "drakconnect30.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:142 en/drakconnect.xml:279 en/drakconnect.xml:351 +#: en/drakconnect.xml:458 en/drakconnect.xml:636 en/drakconnect.xml:688 +#: en/drakconnect.xml:780 +msgid "The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:150 +msgid "A new Satellite connection (DVB)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:152 en/drakconnect.xml:696 en/draknetcenter.xml:136 +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:142 en/draknetcenter.xml:203 +msgid "" +"This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you " +"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:158 +msgid "A new Cable modem connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:172 +msgid "You have to specify a authentication method:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:176 +msgid "None" +msgstr "無" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:180 +msgid "" +"BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to provide User name " +"and password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:191 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers " +"are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained " +"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The " +"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, " +"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. " +"The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option " +"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers " +"have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address " +"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:252 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS servers " +"to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME " +"is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is " +"attributed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:263 +msgid "" +"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</" +"emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your computer is " +"called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is \"splash.boatanchor.net\", " +"the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". Unless you specifically need " +"it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, domestic connection would not " +"need this setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:273 +msgid "drakconnect32.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:287 +msgid "A new DSL connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:291 +msgid "" +"If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select one and to " +"configure it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:296 en/drakconnect.xml:663 +msgid "" +"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your " +"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</" +"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:303 en/drakconnect.xml:380 +msgid "Select one of the protocols available:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:307 +msgid "Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)" +msgstr "動態主機設定協定 (DHCP)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:311 +msgid "Manual TCP/IP configuration" +msgstr "手動組態設定 TCP/IP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:315 +msgid "PPP over ADSL (PPPoA)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:319 +msgid "PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)" +msgstr "PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:323 +msgid "Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)" +msgstr "點對點通道協定 (PPTP)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:329 +msgid "Access settings" +msgstr "連結設定" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:333 en/drakconnect.xml:678 +msgid "Account Login (user name)" +msgstr "帳號登入 (使用者名稱)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:337 en/drakconnect.xml:414 en/drakconnect.xml:682 +msgid "Account password" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:341 +msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:345 +msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:289 en/drakconnect.xml:359 en/drakconnect.xml:646 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"orderedlist\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:357 +msgid "A new ISDN connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:361 en/drakconnect.xml:706 +msgid "The wizard asks which device to configure:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:365 +msgid "Manual choice (internal ISDN card)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:369 +msgid "External ISDN modem" +msgstr "外接式 ISDN 數據機" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:375 +msgid "" +"A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and manufacturer. " +"Select your card." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:384 +msgid "Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe (DHCP)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:389 +msgid "Protocol for Europe (EDSS1)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:395 +msgid "" +"A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries. Select your " +"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</" +"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave you. Then it is " +"asked for parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:402 +msgid "Connection name" +msgstr "連線名稱" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:406 +msgid "Phone number" +msgstr "電話號碼" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:410 +msgid "Login ID" +msgstr "登入的 ID" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:418 +msgid "Authentication method" +msgstr "認證方式" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:424 +msgid "" +"After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by automatic or " +"manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and Subnet mask." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:430 +msgid "" +"The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are obtained, by " +"automatic or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to " +"put:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:436 +msgid "Domain name" +msgstr "網域名稱" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:440 +msgid "First and second DNS Server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:444 +msgid "" +"Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to select only if you " +"are sure that your provider is configured to accept it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:452 +msgid "" +"The next step is to choose how the gateway address is obtained, by automatic " +"or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to enter the " +"IP address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:464 +msgid "A new Wireless connection (WiFi)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:468 +msgid "" +"A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an entry for " +"Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure. Use ndiswrapper " +"only if the other configuration methods did not work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:475 +msgid "" +"At this step, the choice is given between the different access points that " +"the card has detected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:480 +msgid "Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:484 +msgid "drakconnect31.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:490 +msgid "Operating mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:494 +msgid "Managed" +msgstr "固定的" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:497 +msgid "To access to an existing access point (the most frequent)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:503 +msgid "Ad-Hoc" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:506 +msgid "To configure direct connection between computers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:514 +msgid "Network Name (ESSID)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:518 +msgid "Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is configured." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:523 +msgid "WPA/WPA2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:526 +msgid "This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware allows it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:532 +msgid "WEP" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:535 +msgid "Some old hardware deals only this encryption method." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:543 +msgid "Encryption key" +msgstr "加密金鑰" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:545 +msgid "It is generally provided with the hardware which give the access point." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:552 +msgid "" +"At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP address or a " +"manual IP address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:561 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers are " +"declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained below. " +"In the last case, IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The HOSTNAME of " +"the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, the name " +"localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. The Hostname can also be " +"provided by the DHCP server with the option <emphasis>Assign host name from " +"DHCP server</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:589 +msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS servers" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:608 +msgid "" +"After accepting the configuration the step, which is common to all " +"connection configurations, is explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:619 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to declare DNS servers. The " +"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, " +"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:625 +msgid "" +"For a residential network, the IP address always looks like " +"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is <emphasis>255.255.255.0</" +"emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are available from your providers " +"website." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:630 +msgid "" +"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</" +"emphasis>. It must seem to your hostname without the first name, before the " +"period." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:644 +msgid "A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:648 +msgid "" +"If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select one and to " +"configure it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:653 +msgid "The PIN is asked. Leave empty if the PIN is not required." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:658 +msgid "" +"The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option " +"<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:670 +msgid "Provide access settings" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:674 +msgid "Access Point Name" +msgstr "無線網路基地台名稱" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:694 +msgid "A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:702 +msgid "A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:710 +msgid "Manual choice" +msgstr "手動選擇" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:714 +msgid "Detected hardware, if any." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:720 +msgid "A list of ports is proposed. Select your port." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:724 +msgid "" +"If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the package " +"<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:729 +msgid "" +"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your " +"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</" +"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave. Then it is asked " +"for Dialup options:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:736 +msgid "<emphasis>Connection name</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:740 +msgid "<emphasis>Phone number</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:744 +msgid "<emphasis>Login ID</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:748 +msgid "<emphasis>Password</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:752 +msgid "<emphasis>Authentication</emphasis>, choose between:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:756 +msgid "PAP/CHAP" +msgstr "PAP/CHAP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:760 +msgid "Script-based" +msgstr "Script-based" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:764 +msgid "PAP" +msgstr "PAP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:768 +msgid "Terminal-based" +msgstr "Terminal-based" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:772 +msgid "CHAP" +msgstr "CHAP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:786 +msgid "Ending the configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:788 +msgid "In the next step, you can specify:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:792 +msgid "<emphasis>Allow users to manage the connection</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:796 +msgid "<emphasis>Start the connection at boot</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:800 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable traffic accounting</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:804 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:809 +msgid "" +"In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is <emphasis>Allow " +"access point roaming</emphasis> which give the possibility to switch " +"automatically between access point according to the signal strength." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:816 +msgid "With the advanced button, you can specify:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:820 +msgid "Metric (10 by default)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:824 +msgid "MTU" +msgstr "MTU" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:828 +msgid "Network Hotplugging" +msgstr "網路熱插拔" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:832 +msgid "Enable IPv6 to IPv4 tunnel" +msgstr "啟用 IPv6 到 IPv4 通道" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:836 +msgid "" +"The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start " +"immediately or not." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:841 +msgid "drakconnect9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:3 +msgid "Open a console as administrator" +msgstr "以管理者身份開啟一個終端機" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:5 +msgid "drakconsole" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:10 +msgid "drakconsole.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakconsole</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives you access to a " +"console which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more " +"information about that." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:5 +msgid "Manage disk partitions" +msgstr "管理磁碟分割區" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:7 +msgid "drakdisk or diskdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:12 +msgid "drakdiskBackup.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:18 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakdisk</emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake</emphasis> " +"as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:17 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is very powerful, a tiny " +"error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a " +"partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll " +"see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on <emphasis>Exit</" +"emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:27 +msgid "" +"If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk you " +"want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:32 +msgid "drakdisk.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:36 +msgid "" +"You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your " +"preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions, " +"resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a " +"partition: it is all possible. The <emphasis><guibutton>Clear all</" +"guibutton></emphasis> button at the bottom is to erase the complete disk, " +"the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:47 +msgid "" +"If you have an UEFI system, you can see a small partition called \"EFI " +"System Partition\" and mounted on /boot/EFI. Never delete it, because it " +"contains all your different operating systems bootloaders." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:52 +msgid "" +"If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot " +"choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition " +"must be unmounted first." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:56 +msgid "It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:58 +msgid "" +"To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have to " +"delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button " +"<guibutton role=\"bold\">Create</guibutton> appears when a disk empty part " +"is selected" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:63 +msgid "You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be created." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:68 +msgid "drakdiskMountedPartition.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:72 +msgid "" +"Selecting <emphasis><guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton></emphasis> " +"gives some extra available actions, like labeling the partition, as can be " +"seen in the screenshot below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:78 +msgid "drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakedm.xml:4 +msgid "Set up display manager" +msgstr "設定登入管理程式" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakedm.xml:5 +msgid "drakedm" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakedm.xml:9 +msgid "drakedm.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakedm.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakedm</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakedm.xml:12 +msgid "" +"Here<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> you can choose which display " +"manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available " +"on your system will be shown." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakedm.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Most users will only notice that the provided login screens look different. " +"However, there are differences in supported features, too. LXDM is a " +"lightweight display manager, SDDM and GDM have more extras." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:3 +msgid "Set up your personal firewall" +msgstr "設定您的個人防火牆" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:5 +msgid "drakfirewall" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:10 +msgid "drakfirewall.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakfirewall</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"Security tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up your personal " +"firewall\". It is the same tool in the first tab of \"Configure system " +"security, permissions and audit\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:20 +msgid "" +"A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming " +"connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the " +"first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection " +"attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box - " +"<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable " +"the firewall, and only check the needed services." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:27 +msgid "" +"It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on " +"<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field " +"<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these " +"examples :" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:32 +msgid "80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:34 +msgid "24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:37 +msgid "The listed ports should be separated by a space." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:39 +msgid "" +"If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is " +"checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:44 +msgid "drakfirewall2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:49 +msgid "" +"If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...) " +"it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even " +"recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:55 +msgid "" +"The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature " +"allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box " +"<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second " +"box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure " +"somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards " +"corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot " +"below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be " +"warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:64 +msgid "These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:69 +msgid "drakfirewall3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:75 +msgid "drakfirewall4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:79 +msgid "" +"In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the " +"Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary " +"packages are downloaded." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:84 +msgid "" +"If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network & " +"Internet, icon Set up a new network interface." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakfont.xml:3 +msgid "Manage, add and remove fonts. Import Windows(TM) fonts" +msgstr "管理、新增及移除字型、匯入 Windows® 字型" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakfont.xml:6 +msgid "drakfont" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfont.xml:11 +msgid "drakfont.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakfont</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab. It " +"allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen " +"above shows:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:22 +msgid "the installed font names, styles and sizes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:26 +msgid "a preview of the selected font." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:30 +msgid "some buttons explained here later." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:36 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Get Windows Fonts: </emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:38 +msgid "" +"This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You " +"must have Microsoft Windows installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:41 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Options:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:43 +msgid "" +"It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly) able " +"to use the fonts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:46 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Uninstall:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:48 +msgid "" +"This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place. Be " +"careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the " +"documents that use them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:52 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:54 +msgid "" +"Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The " +"supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the " +"fonts to install, click on <emphasis role=\"bold\">Install</emphasis> when " +"done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:60 +msgid "" +"If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont " +"main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:3 +msgid "Parental Controls" +msgstr "家長控制" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakguard.xml:5 +msgid "drakguard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakguard.xml:10 +msgid "drakguard.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakguard</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia " +"Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental Control</" +"guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the drakguard " +"package (not installed by default)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:21 en/msecgui.xml:19 +msgid "Presentation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to " +"restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three " +"useful capabilities:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:29 +msgid "" +"It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by " +"controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:35 +msgid "" +"It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can " +"only execute what you accept them to execute." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:40 +msgid "" +"It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through blacklists/" +"whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the website. To " +"achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental control blocker " +"DansGuardian." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:49 +msgid "Configuring Parental controls" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:52 +msgid "" +"If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2, " +"Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on " +"your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel " +"feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named " +"users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by " +"an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this " +"prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will " +"then suggest you reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:61 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental " +"control is enabled and the access to <guilabel>Block programs</guilabel> tab " +"is opened." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:65 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the " +"websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all " +"the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:69 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have " +"their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the " +"right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are " +"not inconvenienced. Select a user in the left hand side and click on " +"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user. Select an " +"user in the right hand side and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to " +"remove him/her from the allowed users." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:77 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Time control:</guibutton> If checked, internet access is allowed " +"with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and " +"<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time " +"window." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:83 +msgid "Blacklist/Whitelist tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:85 +msgid "" +"Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the " +"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:90 +msgid "Block Programs Tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:92 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to " +"restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the " +"applications you wish to block." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:96 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand " +"side will not be subject to acl blocking." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:9 +msgid "Share the Internet connection with other local machines" +msgstr "分享網際網路連線" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakgw.xml:12 +msgid "drakgw" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakgw.xml:17 +msgid "drakgw.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:25 +msgid "Principles" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakgw.xml:29 +msgid "../drakgw-net.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>This is useful when you have a " +"computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local " +"network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to " +"other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the " +"gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card " +"must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to " +"the Internet (2)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:39 +msgid "" +"The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are " +"set up, as documented in <xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:45 +msgid "Gateway wizard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:48 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakgw</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:47 +msgid "" +"The wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> offers successive steps " +"which are shown below:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:54 +msgid "" +"If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this " +"and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:60 +msgid "" +"specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard " +"automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that " +"what is proposed is correct." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:66 +msgid "" +"specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes " +"one, check that this is correct." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:71 +msgid "" +"The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask " +"and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual " +"configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:78 +msgid "" +"specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard " +"will check that <code>bind</code> is installed. Otherwise, you have to " +"specify the address of a DNS server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:84 +msgid "" +"specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard " +"will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure " +"it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:91 +msgid "" +"specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard " +"will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it, " +"with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the " +"proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:99 +msgid "" +"The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to " +"printers and to share them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:104 +msgid "" +"You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:109 +msgid "Configure the client" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:111 +msgid "" +"If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to " +"specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address " +"automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting " +"to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is " +"using." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:117 +msgid "" +"If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular " +"specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the " +"gateway." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:123 +msgid "Stop connection sharing" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:125 +msgid "" +"If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch " +"the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the sharing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:3 +msgid "Hosts definitions" +msgstr "主機定義" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:5 +msgid "drakhosts" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:10 +msgid "drakhosts.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakhosts</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:14 +msgid "" +"If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed IP-" +"addresses, this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to " +"specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name " +"instead of the IP-address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:20 +msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:22 +msgid "" +"With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window " +"to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an " +"alias which can be used in the same way that the name is." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:27 +msgid "<guibutton>Modify</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:29 +msgid "" +"You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the " +"same window." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3 +msgid "Advanced setup for network interfaces and firewall" +msgstr "網路界面與防火牆的進階設定" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3 +msgid "drakinvictus" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:8 +msgid "drakinvictus.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:12 en/draknetcenter.xml:187 en/drakups.xml:12 +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:12 en/drakxservices.xml:12 +msgid "" +"This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you " +"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakinvictus</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:10 +msgid "Network Center" +msgstr "網路中心" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:12 +msgid "draknetcenter" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:17 +msgid "draknetcenter.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draknetcenter</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"Network & Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Network " +"Center\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:31 +msgid "" +"When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks " +"configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite, " +"etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending " +"on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its " +"settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a " +"network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, " +"ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:43 +msgid "../draknetcenterEthernet-on.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:47 +msgid "../draknetcenterEthernet-off.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:52 +msgid "../draknetcenterWireless-off.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:56 +msgid "../draknetcenterWireless-on.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:39 +msgid "" +"In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the " +"first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <placeholder " +"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/> (this one is not connected<placeholder " +"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"1\"/> ) and the second section shows " +"wireless networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <placeholder type=" +"\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"2\"/> and this one <placeholder type=" +"\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"3\"/>if connected. For the other network types, " +"the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not " +"connected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:62 +msgid "" +"In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected " +"networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal strengh</" +"guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and the " +"<guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then either " +"on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> or " +"<guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network to " +"another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings window " +"(see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption key in " +"particular)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:72 +msgid "Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:76 +msgid "draknetcenter1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:84 +msgid "The Monitor button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:88 +msgid "draknetcenter4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:92 +msgid "" +"This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the " +"PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is " +"available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray " +"-> Monitor Network</guimenu>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:97 +msgid "" +"There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the " +"local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which " +"gives details about connection status." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:102 +msgid "" +"At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic accounting</" +"guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:108 +msgid "The Configure button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:110 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">A - For a wired network</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:114 +msgid "draknetcenter2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:118 +msgid "" +"It is possible to change all the settings given during network creation. " +"Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton> " +"<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual " +"configuration may give better results." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:123 +msgid "" +"For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks " +"like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the " +"<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are " +"available from your providers website." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:128 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count " +"the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in " +"the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may " +"have to reconnect to the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:133 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager:" +"</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:140 en/draknetcenter.xml:185 +msgid "<guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:148 +msgid "draknetcenter5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:152 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">B - For a wireless network</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:154 +msgid "Only the items not already seen above are explained." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:158 +msgid "draknetcenter3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:162 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Operating mode:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:164 +msgid "" +"Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access " +"point, there is an <emphasis role=\"bold\">ESSID</emphasis> detected. " +"Select <guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as " +"the access point, your network card needs to support this mode." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:170 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:173 +msgid "If it is a private network, you need to know these settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:175 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a " +"passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA " +"personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used " +"in private networks." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:180 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:182 +msgid "" +"Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access " +"point while remaining connected to the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:193 +msgid "draknetcenter6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:201 +msgid "The Advanced Settings button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:209 +msgid "draknetcenter7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:12 +msgid "Manage different network profiles" +msgstr "管理不同的網路設定檔" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:14 en/draknetprofile.xml:46 +msgid "Draknetprofile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Each network interface of a Mageia system is initially configured with a fix " +"set of parameters. This corresponds to what is expected by a user of a " +"desktop computer, but may not be adequate when the system is moved between " +"various network environments: having the system run in different network " +"environments will require that multiple configurations co-exist for a given " +"network device - otherwise the interface might need to be re-configured each " +"time the network environment changes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:31 +msgid "Profiles" +msgstr "自訂檔案" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Linux provides support for multiple configurations of network devices as a " +"standard feature. The notion of a <emphasis role='bold'>\"network profile\"</" +"emphasis> refers to a set of configurations of network devices, defined for " +"a specific network environment. Each network profile has a <emphasis " +"role='bold'>name</emphasis> - the initial configuration that comes out of " +"system generation has the name <emphasis>\"default\"</emphasis>; when a new " +"profile is created, a name must be specified which is different from all " +"already existing profile names." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:48 +msgid "" +"Draknetprofile is a - very simple - component of the Mageia Control Center " +"(MCC), it provides a Graphical User Interface (GUI) for managing profiles. " +"This GUI allows to" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:56 +msgid "" +"switch between profiles - i.e. activate a target profile to become the " +"\"current profile\"," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:61 +msgid "create a new, additional profile," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:65 +msgid "delete a profile from the list of defined profiles." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:73 +msgid "Running Draknetprofile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:76 +msgid "Defining profiles, profile switching" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:78 +msgid "" +"Defining/modifying profiles concerns the entire Linux system and all its " +"users. Running draknetprofile therefore requires root privileges. Normally, " +"launching is achieved from within MCC (which already runs as root):" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:86 +msgid "./draknetprofile_mcc.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:90 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role='bold'>Figure 1: Mageia Control Center: Network & " +"Internet tab</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:98 +msgid "" +"launch the MCC by hitting the MCC icon in one of the panels of your desktop," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:103 +msgid "select the \"Network & Internet\" tab," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:107 +msgid "" +"hit \"Manage different network profiles\" in the \"Personalize and Secure " +"your network\" Section (solid red contour in Figure 1)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:113 +msgid "" +"Draknetprofile can also be launched by a command-line instruction from a " +"terminal emulator with root privileges (this may be helpful when standard-" +"output or error-output from draknetprofile needs to be consulted - for " +"instance for debugging). Simply type:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><informaltable><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:124 +msgid "<literal> draknetprofile </literal>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:130 +msgid "After the launch, the main page of Draknetprofile will be displayed:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:136 +msgid "./draknetprofile_main.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:140 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role='bold'>Figure 2: Management actions of Draknetprofile</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:145 +msgid "" +"The upper zone of the window contains the list of the names of all presently " +"defined profiles. The bottom zone presents a series of buttons:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:152 +msgid "" +"\"Activate\" ... establish the selected profile (top zone of the window) as " +"the current profile (and save the properties of the old profile);" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:158 +msgid "\"New\" ... create a new profile;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:162 +msgid "" +"\"Delete\" ... delete the selected profile from the list of defined profiles;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:167 +msgid "\"Quit\" ... exit from Draknetprofile." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:171 +msgid "" +"Before hitting the \"Activate\" or the \"Delete\" button, you have to select " +"a profile from the list: select it by a left-button click on the name of the " +"target profile." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:175 +msgid "" +"Hitting the \"New\" button will launch an auxiliary window where you can " +"type the name of the profile you want to create; this name must be different " +"from any already existing profile. This profile will be created as a precise " +"copy of the currently active profile and immediately activated as the " +"current profile. You will probably then need to specify its properties " +"(modify the automatically created configuration) in a second, independent " +"action:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:188 +msgid "exit from Draknetprofile (hit the \"Quit\" button)," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:192 +msgid "" +"back in the \"Network & Internet\" tab, you select the tab \"Set up a " +"new network interface (...)\" (marked with dashed red contour in Figure 1)," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:198 +msgid "" +"you then go through the steps for configuring the interface; they are " +"similar to those you did for configuring the original interface during " +"system generation - as documented in the <link linkend='drakconnect-" +"ti1'>Drakconnect manual</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:206 +msgid "" +"The middle zone of the window is normally hidden, hit the \"Advanced\" " +"button to make it visible. It should display the list of names of " +"Draknetprofile <emphasis role='bold'>\"modules\"</emphasis> (such as " +"\"network\", \"firewall\", \"urpmi\"), each with a check-button next to the " +"name; these check-buttons determine whether the properties controlled by " +"that module are included into the profile or not." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:217 +msgid "Using a system that has more than one profile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:219 +msgid "" +"In a system where several profiles are defined, an additional user " +"interaction is required when the system boots: at the very end of the " +"bootstrapping activities - just before the Desktop Environment starts - you " +"will get a message like" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><informaltable><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:230 +msgid "" +"<literal> Select network profile: (1) default (2) roaming* </" +"literal>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:237 +msgid "" +"Type 1 or 2 to select the \"default\", respectively the \"roaming\" profile, " +"or carriage-return to select the profile that is marked with an asterisk " +"(the profile that was active when the system had been shut down)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:242 +msgid "" +"Presently (Mageia-5) there appears to be an intermittent problem: it happens " +"that the system becomes unresponsive after soliciting the user to select a " +"profile. The only way out of this situation is to launch another boot. This " +"problem is under investigation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:251 +msgid "Appendix: Files relevant to Draknetprofile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:253 +msgid "" +"The configuration data of network interfaces are stored in the directory " +"<emphasis>/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/</emphasis>, in files with names " +"like <emphasis>ifcfg-xxx</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:257 +msgid "" +"The name of the currently active profile is maintained in the file " +"<emphasis>/etc/netprofile/current</emphasis> ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:9 +msgid "Share drives and directories using NFS" +msgstr "使用 NFS 分享磁碟機與目錄" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draknfs.xml:11 +msgid "draknfs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknfs.xml:16 +msgid "draknfs.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:24 +msgid "Prerequisites" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:27 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draknfs</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:26 +msgid "" +"When the wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is launched for the " +"first time, it may display the following message:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:33 +msgid "The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:37 +msgid "" +"After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:42 +msgid "Main window" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:44 +msgid "" +"A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list " +"is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a " +"configuration tool." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:50 +msgid "Modify entry" +msgstr "修改項目" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:52 +msgid "" +"The configuration tool is labeled \"Modify entry\". It may be also launched " +"with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are " +"available." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknfs.xml:58 +msgid "draknfs4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:64 +msgid "NFS Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:66 +msgid "" +"Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The " +"<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose " +"it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:72 +msgid "Host access" +msgstr "主機存取" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:74 +msgid "" +"Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared " +"directory." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:77 +msgid "NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:79 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name " +"recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:83 +msgid "<emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard " +"characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the " +"domain cs.foo.edu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:90 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all " +"hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either " +"`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:96 +msgid "User ID Mapping" +msgstr "使用者 ID 對應" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:98 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid " +"0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client " +"cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on " +"the server itself." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:103 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root squashing. " +"This option is mainly useful for diskless clients (no_root_squash)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:107 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids " +"to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP " +"directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID " +"mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:113 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of " +"the anonymous account." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:118 +msgid "Advanced options" +msgstr "進階選項" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:120 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests " +"originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024). This option " +"is on by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:124 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read " +"and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any " +"request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by " +"using this option." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:129 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from " +"violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made " +"by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:134 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can " +"help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See " +"exports(5) man page for more details." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:141 en/draksambashare.xml:176 +msgid "Menu entries" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:143 +msgid "So far the list has at least one entry." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknfs.xml:147 +msgid "draknfs5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:153 en/draksambashare.xml:182 +msgid "File|Write conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:155 +msgid "Save the current configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:159 +msgid "NFS Server|Restart" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:161 en/draksambashare.xml:197 +msgid "" +"The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:166 +msgid "NFS Server|Reload" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:168 en/draksambashare.xml:204 +msgid "" +"The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration files." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:10 +msgid "Proxy" +msgstr "代理伺服器" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:12 +msgid "drakproxy" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:17 +msgid "drakproxy.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakproxy</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:22 +msgid "" +"If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use " +"this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> to configure it. Your net " +"administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify " +"some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:30 +msgid "" +"From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a " +"proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts as " +"an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other " +"servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, " +"such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a " +"different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to " +"simplify and control their complexity." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:3 +msgid "Configure Media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:5 +msgid "drakrpm-edit-media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:17 +msgid "drakrpm-edit-media.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><important><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:22 +msgid "" +"First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (also known as " +"repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the media sources " +"to be used to install and update packages and applications. (see Add button " +"below)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:27 +msgid "" +"If you install (or upgrade) Mageia using an optical media (DVD or CD) or a " +"USB device, there will be a software source configured to the optical media " +"used. To avoid being asked to insert the media when you install new " +"packages, you should disable (or delete) this media. (It will have the " +"media type CD-Rom)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Your system is running under an architecture which may be 32-bit (called " +"i586), or 64-bit (called x86_64). Some packages are independent of whether " +"your system is 32-bit or 64-bit; these are called noarch packages. They " +"don't have their own noarch directories on the mirrors, but are all in both " +"the i586 and the x86_64 media." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:42 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:40 +msgid "" +"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Software management.</emphasis><placeholder type=\"footnote\" " +"id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:46 +msgid "The columns" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:48 +msgid "Column Enable:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:50 +msgid "" +"The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with " +"some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:54 +msgid "Column Update:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:56 +msgid "" +"The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be enabled. Only " +"media with \"Update\" in its name should be selected. For security reasons, " +"this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open a console as root " +"and type <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media --expert.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:62 +msgid "Column medium:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final release " +"versions contain at least:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:69 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs " +"available supported by Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:74 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs " +"which are not free" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:79 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there " +"might be patent claims in some countries." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:82 +msgid "Each medium has 4 sub-sections:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the " +"this version of Mageia was released." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:91 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since " +"release due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium " +"enabled, even with a very slow internet connection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:97 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions " +"backported from Cauldron (the next version under development)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:103 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests " +"of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the " +"corrections." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:111 +msgid "The buttons on the right" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:114 +msgid "<guibutton>Remove:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:116 +msgid "" +"To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise to " +"remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example) since " +"all the packages it contains are in the official Core release medium." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:121 +msgid "<guibutton>Edit:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:123 +msgid "" +"Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader and " +"proxy)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:126 +msgid "<guibutton>Add:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Add the official repositories available on the Internet. These repositories " +"contain only safe and well tested software. Clicking on the \"Add\" button " +"adds the mirrorlist to your configuration, it is designed to make sure that " +"you install and update from a mirror close to you. If you prefer to choose a " +"specific mirror, then add it by choosing \"Add a specific media mirror\" " +"from the drop-down \"File\" menu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:135 +msgid "<guibutton>Up and down arrows:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:137 +msgid "" +"Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads the list " +"in the displayed order and will install the first package found for the same " +"release number - in the event of a version mismatch, the latest release will " +"be installed. So if possible, put the fastest repositories at the top." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:145 en/harddrake2.xml:64 +msgid "The menu" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:147 +msgid "<guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:149 +msgid "" +"A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to update and " +"click on the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:152 +msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:154 +msgid "" +"Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's " +"too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the " +"actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them out. " +"Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose " +"between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the " +"<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by " +"clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:165 +msgid "drakrpmEditMedia2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:169 +msgid "" +"You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very " +"close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available " +"mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:174 +msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:176 +msgid "" +"It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for example) that " +"isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:181 +msgid "rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:179 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the medium type, find a " +"smart name that well define the medium and give the URL (or the path, " +"according to the medium type)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:187 +msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:189 +msgid "" +"This item allows you to choose when to \"Verify RPMs to be installed" +"\" (always or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to " +"define the download policy for information about the packages (on demand -by " +"default-, update only, always or never)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:194 +msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:196 +msgid "" +"To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to authenticate " +"the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or disallow a key. In the " +"window that appear, select a medium and then click on <guibutton>Add</" +"guibutton> to allow a new key or to select a key and click on " +"<guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to disallow that key." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:203 +msgid "Do this with care, as with all security-related questions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:204 +msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:206 +msgid "" +"If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can configure it " +"here. You only need to give the <guibutton>Proxy hostname</guibutton> and if " +"necessary a <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:213 +msgid "" +"For more information about configuring the media, see <link ns2:href=" +"\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Software_management\">the Mageia Wiki page</" +"link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:3 +msgid "Share directories and drives with Samba" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:6 +msgid "draksambashare" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:11 +msgid "draksambashare.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some " +"resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure " +"the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is " +"also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the " +"resources of the Samba server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:28 +msgid "Preparation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:30 +msgid "" +"To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP " +"address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with " +"<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>, or at the DHCP server which identifies " +"the station with its MAC-address and give it always the same address. The " +"firewall has also to allow the incoming requests to the Samba server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:41 +msgid "Wizard - Standalone server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:44 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing<emphasis role=\"bold" +"\"> draksambashare</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:43 +msgid "" +"At the first run, the tools <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> checks " +"if needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are " +"not yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:52 +msgid "draksambashare0.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:56 +msgid "" +"In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already " +"selected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:60 +msgid "draksambashare1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the " +"access to the shared resources." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:67 +msgid "" +"The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on " +"the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:72 +msgid "draksambashare2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:76 +msgid "Choose the security mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:80 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the " +"resource" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:85 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for " +"each share" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:90 +msgid "" +"You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP " +"address or host name." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:95 +msgid "draksambashare3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:99 +msgid "" +"Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be " +"described in the Windows workstations." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:104 +msgid "draksambashare4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:108 +msgid "" +"The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:113 +msgid "draksambashare5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:117 +msgid "" +"The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the " +"configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in <code>/" +"etc/samba/smb.conf</code>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:123 +msgid "draksambashare6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:129 +msgid "Wizard - Primary domain controller" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:133 +msgid "draksambashare13.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:131 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>If the \"Primary domain " +"controller\" option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is " +"to support or not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are " +"then the same as for standalone server, except you can choose also the " +"security mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:142 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and " +"group accounts in a central, shared, account repository. The centralized " +"account repository is shared between (security) controllers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:151 +msgid "Declare a directory to share" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:153 +msgid "With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:157 +msgid "draksambashare15.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:161 +msgid "" +"A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the <guibutton>Modify</" +"guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether the directory is " +"visible to the public, writable or browseable. The share name can not be " +"modified." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:168 +msgid "draksambashare16.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:178 +msgid "When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:184 +msgid "Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:189 +msgid "Samba server|Configure" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:191 +msgid "The wizard can be run again with this command." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:195 +msgid "Samba server|Restart" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:202 +msgid "Samba Server|Reload" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:210 +msgid "Printers share" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:212 +msgid "Samba also allows you to share printers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:216 +msgid "draksambashare17.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><screenshot> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:214 en/drakvpn.xml:46 en/logdrake.xml:89 +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:58 en/rpmdrake.xml:163 en/rpmdrake.xml:173 +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:183 en/rpmdrake.xml:193 en/rpmdrake.xml:203 +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:238 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:222 +msgid "Samba users" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:227 +msgid "draksambashare18.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:224 +msgid "" +"In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared " +"resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref " +"linkend=\"userdrake\"/><placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksec.xml:3 +msgid "Configure authentication for Mageia tools" +msgstr "設定 Mageia 工具的認證" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksec.xml:6 +msgid "draksec" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksec.xml:11 +msgid "draksec0.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draksec</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Security</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:19 +msgid "" +"It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks " +"usually done by the administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:22 +msgid "Click on the little arrow before the item you want to drop down:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksec.xml:27 +msgid "draksec.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in " +"the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a " +"drop down list on the right side gives the choice between:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:37 +msgid "" +"Default: The launch mode depends on the chosen security level. See in the " +"same MCC tab, the tool \"Configure system security, permissions and audit\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:43 +msgid "User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:48 +msgid "" +"Administrator password: The root password is asked before the tool launching" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:53 +msgid "No password: The tool is launched without asking any password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:11 +msgid "Snapshots" +msgstr "快照" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:12 +msgid "draksnapshot-config" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:18 +msgid "draksnapshot-config.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draksnapshot-config </emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is available in MCC's " +"<guilabel>System</guilabel> tab, in the <guilabel>Administration tools</" +"guilabel> section." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:26 +msgid "" +"When you start this tool in MCC for the first time, you will see a message " +"about installing draksnapshot. Click on <guibutton>Install</guibutton> to " +"proceed. Draksnapshot and some other packages it needs will be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Click again on <guilabel>Snapshots</guilabel>, you will see the " +"<guilabel>Settings</guilabel> screen. Tick <guilabel>Enable Backups</" +"guilabel> and, if you want to backup the whole system, <guilabel>Backup the " +"whole system</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:34 +msgid "" +"If you only want to backup part of your directories, then choose " +"<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>. You will see a little pop-up screen. Use the " +"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> and <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> buttons next to " +"the <guilabel>Backup list</guilabel> to include or exclude directories and " +"files from the backup. Use the same buttons next to the <guilabel>Exclude</" +"guilabel> list to remove subdirectories and/or files from the chosen " +"directories, that should <emphasis role=\"bold\">not</emphasis> be included " +"in the backup. Click on <guibutton>Close</guibutton> when you are done." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Now give the path to <guilabel>Where to backup</guilabel>, or choose the " +"<guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select the correct path. Any mounted " +"USB-key or external HD can be found in <emphasis role=\"bold\">/run/media/" +"your_user_name/</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:45 +msgid "Click on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> to make the snapshot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksound.xml:3 +msgid "Sound Configuration" +msgstr "聲音設定" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksound.xml:4 +msgid "draksound" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksound.xml:8 +msgid "draksound.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:11 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draksound</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:11 en/mousedrake.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:13 +msgid "" +"Draksound deals with the sound configuration, PulseAudio options and " +"troubleshooting. It will help you if you experience sound problems or if you " +"change the sound card." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound " +"inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting " +"sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio " +"volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:20 +msgid "" +"PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it " +"enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:22 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It " +"is also recommended to leave it enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:24 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> button gives assistance with " +"fixing any problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this " +"before asking the community for help." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button displays a new window with an " +"obvious button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksound.xml:30 +msgid "draksound1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakups.xml:3 +msgid "Set up a UPS for power monitoring" +msgstr "建立監控電源的 UPS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakups.xml:3 +msgid "drakups" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakups.xml:8 +msgid "drakups.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakups.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakups</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:3 +msgid "Configure VPN Connection to secure network access" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:6 +msgid "drakvpn" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:11 +msgid "drakvpn1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:19 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakvpn</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:18 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure " +"secure access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local " +"workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the " +"configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is " +"already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the " +"network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:30 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "組態設定" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:32 +msgid "" +"First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which " +"protocol is used for your virtual private network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:35 +msgid "Then give your connection a name." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:37 +msgid "At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:42 +msgid "For Cisco VPN" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:48 +msgid "drakvpn3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:54 +msgid "" +"For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the " +"first time the tool is used." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:59 +msgid "drakvpn7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:57 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the files that you " +"received from the network administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:64 +msgid "Advanced parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:68 +msgid "drakvpn8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:72 +msgid "The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:76 +msgid "" +"When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN " +"connection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:79 +msgid "" +"This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network " +"connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect " +"to this VPN." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3 +msgid "Configure webserver" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard apache2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_apache2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:12 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a " +"web server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:15 +msgid "What is a web server?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Web server is the software that helps to deliver web content that can be " +"accessed through the Internet. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:21 +msgid "Setting up a web server with drakwizard apache2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:23 +msgid "Welcome to the web server wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:30 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:34 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:49 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:34 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:55 +msgid "" +"The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:38 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:38 +msgid "Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:41 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Exposing the web server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad " +"things." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:49 +msgid "Server User Module" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:52 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:56 +msgid "Allows users to create their own sites." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:60 +msgid "User web directory name" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:63 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:67 +msgid "" +"The user needs to create and populate this directory, then the server will " +"display it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:71 +msgid "Server Document Root" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:74 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:78 +msgid "Allows you to configure the path to the web servers default documents." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:82 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:83 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:71 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:144 +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:105 +msgid "Summary" +msgstr "摘要" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:85 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:89 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:91 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:78 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:153 +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:112 +msgid "" +"Take a second to check these options, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:93 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:82 +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:173 en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:116 +msgid "Finish" +msgstr "完成" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:96 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:100 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:89 +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:183 en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:123 +msgid "You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3 +msgid "Configure DNS" +msgstr "設定 DNS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard bind" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_bind.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard bind</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:3 +msgid "Configure DHCP" +msgstr "設定 DHCP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:5 +msgid "drakwizard dhcp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:10 +msgid "drakwizard_dhcp.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool is broken in Mageia 4 because of new naming scheme for the Net " +"interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:19 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a " +"<acronym>DHCP</acronym> server. It is a component of drakwizard which should " +"be installed before you can access to it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:26 +msgid "What is DHCP?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:28 +msgid "" +"The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (<acronym>DHCP</acronym>) is a " +"standardized networking protocol used on IP networks that dynamically " +"configures IP addresses and other information that is needed for Internet " +"communication. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:35 +msgid "Setting up a DHCP server with drakwizard dhcp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:37 +msgid "Welcome to the DHCP server wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:45 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:54 +msgid "Selecting Adaptor" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:58 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:62 +msgid "" +"Choose the network interface, which is connected to the subnet, and for " +"which DHCP will assign IP addresses, and then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:68 +msgid "Select IP range" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:72 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:76 +msgid "" +"Select the beginning and ending IP addresses of the range of IPs you want " +"the server to offer, along with the IP of the gateway machine connecting to " +"some place outside the local network, hopefully close to the Internet, then " +"click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:87 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:96 +msgid "Hold on..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:100 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:104 +msgid "" +"This can be fixed. Click <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> a few times and " +"change things around." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:109 +msgid "Hours later..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:113 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:121 en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:87 +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:189 +msgid "What is done" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:125 +msgid "Installing the package dhcp-server if needed;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:129 +msgid "" +"Saving <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf</code> in <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf.orig;</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:134 +msgid "" +"Creating a new <code>dhcpd.conf</code> starting from <code>/usr/share/" +"wizards/dhcp_wizard/scripts/dhcpd.conf.default</code> and adding the new " +"parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:140 +msgid "<code>hname</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:144 +msgid "<code>dns</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:148 +msgid "net" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:152 +msgid "ip" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:156 +msgid "<code>mask</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:160 +msgid "<code>rng1</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:164 +msgid "<code>rng2</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:168 +msgid "<code>dname</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:172 +msgid "<code>gateway</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:176 +msgid "<code>tftpserverip</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:180 +msgid "<code>dhcpd_interface</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:186 +msgid "" +"Also modifying Webmin configuration file <code>/etc/webmin/dhcpd/config</" +"code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:191 +msgid "Restarting <code>dhcpd.</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:10 +msgid "Configure time" +msgstr "設定時間" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:12 +msgid "drakwizard ntp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:19 +msgid "drakwizard_ntp.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:25 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> purpose is to set the " +"time of your server synchronised with an external server. It isn't installed " +"by default and you have to also install the drakwizard and drakwizard-base " +"packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:32 +msgid "Setup a NTP server with drakwizard ntp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:36 +msgid "" +"After a welcome screen (see above), the second one ask you to choose three " +"time servers in the drop down lists and suggests to use pool.ntp.org twice " +"because this server always points to available time servers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:43 +msgid "drakwizard-ntp1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:49 +msgid "drakwizard-ntp2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata><info> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:51 +msgid "<author> <personname/> </author> <pubdate/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:50 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:63 +msgid "" +"The following screens allows to choose the region and the city and then, you " +"arrive on a summary. If something is wrong, you can obviously change it " +"using the <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>button. If everything is right, " +"click on the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button to proceed to the test. It " +"may take a while and you finally get this screen below:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:72 +msgid "drakwizard-ntp3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:78 +msgid "Click on the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button to close the tool" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:89 +msgid "This tool executes the following steps:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:93 +msgid "Installing the package <code>ntp</code> if needed" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:97 +msgid "" +"Saving the files <code>/etc/sysconfig/clock</code> to <code>/etc/sysconfig/" +"clock.orig</code> and <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> to <code>/etc/ntp/" +"step-tickers.orig</code>;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:104 +msgid "" +"Writing a new file <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> with the list of " +"servers;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:109 +msgid "" +"Modifying the file <code>/etc/ntp.conf</code> by inserting the first server " +"name;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:114 +msgid "" +"Stopping and starting <code>crond</code>, <code>atd</code> and <code>ntpd</" +"code> services;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:119 +msgid "" +"Setting the hardware clock to the current system time with UTC reference." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3 +msgid "Configure FTP" +msgstr "設定 FTP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard proftpd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_proftpd.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:12 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up an " +"<acronym>FTP</acronym> server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:15 +msgid "What is <acronym>FTP</acronym>?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:17 +msgid "" +"File Transfer Protocol (<acronym>FTP</acronym>) is a standard network " +"protocol used to transfer files from one host to another host over a " +"<acronym>TCP</acronym>-based network, such as the Internet. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:21 +msgid "Setting up an FTP server with drakwizard proftpd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:23 +msgid "Welcome to the FTP wizard. Buckle up." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:30 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:41 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Exposing the FTP server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad " +"things." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:49 +msgid "Server Information" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:52 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:56 +msgid "" +"Enter name the sever will use to introduce itself, someone to email " +"complaints too and whether to allow root login access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:60 +msgid "Server Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:63 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:67 +msgid "" +"Set listening port, jailed user, allow resumes and/or <acronym>FXP</acronym> " +"(File eXchange Protocol)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:74 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:85 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:10 +msgid "Configure proxy" +msgstr "設定 proxy" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:12 +msgid "drakwizard squid" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:17 +msgid "drakwizard_squid.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:23 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard squid</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a " +"proxy server. It is a component of drakwizard which should be installed " +"before you can access to it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:29 +msgid "What is a proxy server?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:31 +msgid "" +"A proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts " +"as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other " +"servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, " +"such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a " +"different server and the proxy server evaluates the request as a way to " +"simplify and control its complexity. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:40 +msgid "Setting up a proxy server with drakwizard squid" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:42 +msgid "Welcome to the proxy server wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:50 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:60 +msgid "Selecting the proxy port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:64 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:69 +msgid "" +"Select the proxy port browsers will connect through, then click " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:74 +msgid "Set Memory and Disk Usage" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:78 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:83 +msgid "" +"Set memory and disk cache limits, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:88 +msgid "Select Network Access Control" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:92 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:97 +msgid "" +"Set visibility to local network or world, then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:102 +msgid "Grant Network Access" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:106 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:111 +msgid "Grant access to local networks, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:116 +msgid "Use Upper Level Proxy Server?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:120 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:125 +msgid "Cascade through another proxy server? If no, skip next step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:130 +msgid "Upper Level Proxy URL and Port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:134 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:139 +msgid "" +"Provide upper level proxy hostname and port, then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:148 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:158 +msgid "Start during boot?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:162 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:168 +msgid "" +"Choose if the proxy server should be started during the boot time, then " +"click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:177 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step10.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:193 +msgid "Installing the package squid if needed;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:197 +msgid "" +"Saving <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf</code> in <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf." +"orig;</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:202 +msgid "" +"Creating a new <code>squid.conf</code> starting from <code>squid.conf." +"default</code> and adding the new parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:208 +msgid "<code>cache_dir</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:212 +msgid "<code>localnet</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:216 +msgid "cache_mem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:220 +msgid "http_port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:224 +msgid "" +"<code>level</code> 1, 2 or 3 and <code>http_access</code> according to level" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:229 +msgid "<code>cache_peer</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:233 +msgid "<code>visible_hostname</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:239 +msgid "Restarting <code>squid.</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3 +msgid "OpenSSH daemon configuration" +msgstr "OpenSSH 組態設定" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard sshd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_sshd.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:13 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:13 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up an " +"<acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:16 +msgid "What is <acronym>SSH</acronym>?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:18 +msgid "" +"Secure Shell (SSH) is a cryptographic network protocol for secure data " +"communication, remote command-line login, remote command execution, and " +"other secure network services between two networked computers that connects, " +"via a secure channel over an insecure network, a server and a client " +"(running SSH server and <acronym>SSH</acronym> client programs, " +"respectively). (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:22 +msgid "Setting up an <acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon with drakwizard sshd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:24 +msgid "Welcome to the Open SSH wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:28 +msgid "Select Type of Configure Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:31 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:35 +msgid "" +"Choose <guilabel>Expert</guilabel> for all options or <guilabel>Newbie</" +"guilabel> to skip steps 3-7, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:39 +msgid "General Options" +msgstr "一般選項" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:42 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:46 +msgid "" +"Sets visibility and root access options. Port 22 is the standard " +"<acronym>SSH</acronym> port." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:50 +msgid "Authentication Methods" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:53 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:57 +msgid "" +"Allow a variety of authentication methods users can use while connecting, " +"then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:61 +msgid "Logging" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:64 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:68 +msgid "" +"Choose logging facility and level of output, then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:72 +msgid "Login Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:75 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:79 +msgid "Configure per-login settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:83 +msgid "User Login Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:86 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:90 +msgid "" +"Configure the user access settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:94 +msgid "Compression and Forwarding" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:97 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:101 +msgid "" +"Configure X11 forwarding and compression during transfer, then click " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:108 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:119 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:3 +msgid "Manage system services by enabling or disabling them" +msgstr "啟動或停用系統服務" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:3 +msgid "drakxservices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:8 +msgid "drakxservices.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakxservices</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:10 +msgid "Hardware configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:12 +msgid "harddrake2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:17 +msgid "harddrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:23 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">harddrake2</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives a general view of " +"the hardware of your computer. When the tool is launched, it executes a job " +"to look for every element of the hardware. For that, it uses the command " +"<code>ldetect </code>which refers to a list of hardware in <code>ldetect-" +"lst</code> package." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:31 +msgid "The window" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:33 +msgid "The window is divided in two columns." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:35 +msgid "" +"The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The devices are " +"grouped by categories. Click on the > to expand the content of a " +"category. Each device can be selected in this column." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:39 +msgid "" +"The right column displays information about the selected device. The " +"<guimenu>Help -> Fields description</guimenu> gives some information " +"about the content of the fields." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:43 +msgid "" +"According to which type of device is selected, either one or two buttons are " +"available at the bottom of the right column:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:48 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Set current driver options</guibutton>: this can be used to " +"parameterize the module which is used in relation to the device. This must " +"used by experts only." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:54 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Run config tool</guibutton>: access to the tool which can " +"configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from the MCC." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:68 +msgid "" +"The <guimenu>options</guimenu> menu gives the opportunity to check boxes to " +"enable automatic detection:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:73 +msgid "modem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:77 +msgid "Jaz devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:81 +msgid "Zip parallel devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:83 +msgid "" +"By default these detections are not enabled, because they are slow. Check " +"the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware connected. Detection will " +"be operational the next time this tool is started." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:3 +msgid "Set up the Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:7 +msgid "keyboarddrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:12 +msgid "keyboarddrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">keyboarddrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:19 +msgid "" +"The keyboarddrake tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> helps you " +"configure the basic layout for the keyboard that you wish to use on Mageia. " +"It affects the keyboard layout for all users on the system. It can be found " +"in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled " +"\"Configure mouse and keyboard\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:29 +msgid "Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed " +"in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each " +"layout should be used for." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:37 +msgid "Keyboard Type" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:39 +msgid "" +"This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are " +"unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/localedrake.xml:10 +msgid "Manage localization for your system" +msgstr "管理您的系統之區域及語言" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/localedrake.xml:13 +msgid "localedrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/localedrake.xml:18 +msgid "localedrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">localedrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can be found in the " +"System section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled \"Manage " +"localization for your system\". It opens with a window in which you can " +"choose your language. The choice is adapted to languages selected during " +"installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button give access to activate " +"compatibility with old encoding (non UTF8)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:34 +msgid "" +"The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected " +"language. The button <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> gives access to " +"countries not listed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:38 +msgid "You have to restart your session after any modifications." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/localedrake.xml:42 +msgid "Input method" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:44 +msgid "" +"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an " +"input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input " +"methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, " +"Korean, etc)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:48 +msgid "" +"For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method so " +"users should not need to configure it manually." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:50 +msgid "" +"Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar functions " +"and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed in another " +"part of the Mageia Control Center. See <xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/logdrake.xml:3 +msgid "View and search system logs" +msgstr "檢視與搜尋系統日誌" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/logdrake.xml:5 +msgid "logdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/logdrake.xml:10 +msgid "logdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">logdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia " +"Control Center System tab, labelled \"<guilabel>View and search system logs</" +"guilabel>\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/logdrake.xml:22 +msgid "To do a search in the logs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to <emphasis>do " +"not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s) to search in " +"the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is possible to " +"limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of the month " +"and year, and check \"<guibutton>Show only for the selected day</guibutton>" +"\". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> button to see the " +"results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the file</guilabel>. It is " +"possible to save the results in the .txt format by clicking on the <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Save</emphasis> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:36 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia " +"configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools. These logs are " +"updated each time a configuration is modified." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/logdrake.xml:43 +msgid "To configure a mail alert" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:45 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and " +"the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured " +"address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:49 +msgid "" +"To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Mail Alert</" +"emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton> Configure " +"the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the running " +"services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to look watch. " +"(See screenshot above)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:55 +msgid "The following services can be watched :" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:59 +msgid "Webmin Service" +msgstr "Webmin 服務" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:63 +msgid "Postfix Mail Server" +msgstr "Postfix 郵件伺服器" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:67 +msgid "FTP Server" +msgstr "FTP 伺服器" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:71 +msgid "Apache World Wide Web Server" +msgstr "Apache WWW 伺服器" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:75 +msgid "SSH Server" +msgstr "SSH 伺服主機" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:79 +msgid "Samba Server" +msgstr "Samba 伺服器" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:83 +msgid "Xinetd Service" +msgstr "Xinetd 服務" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:87 +msgid "BIND Domain Name Resolve" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/logdrake.xml:91 +msgid "logdrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:97 +msgid "" +"In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider " +"unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows " +"the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone " +"out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value " +"to 3 times the number of processors." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:103 +msgid "" +"In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the " +"person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local " +"or on the Internet)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:10 +msgid "Display Available NFS And SMB Shares" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:11 +msgid "lsnetdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">lsnetdrake</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and " +"used on the command line." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you " +"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Documentation_team\"> the Documentation team.</link> Thanking you in " +"advance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:3 +msgid "Display Your PCI, USB and PCMCIA Information" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:6 +msgid "lspcidrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:10 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">lspcidrake</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:9 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and " +"used on the command line. It will give some more information if used under " +"root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"lspcidrake gives the list of all the connected devices to the computer (USB, " +"PCI and PCMCIA) and the used drivers. It needs the ldetect and ldetect-lst " +"packages to work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:20 +msgid "lspcidrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"With the -v option, lspcidrake adds the vendor and device identifications." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:27 +msgid "" +"lspcidrake often generates very long lists, so, to find an information, it " +"is often used in a pipeline with the grep command, like in these examples:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:31 +msgid "Information about the graphic card;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:33 +msgid "<command>lspcidrake | grep VGA</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:35 +msgid "Information about the network" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:37 +msgid "<command>lspcidrake | grep -i network</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:39 +msgid "-i to ignore case distinctions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:41 +msgid "" +"In this screenshot below, you can see the action of the -v option for " +"lspcidrake and the -i option for grep." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:46 +msgid "lspcidrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:50 +msgid "" +"There is another tool that gives information about the hardware, it is " +"called <emphasis role=\"bold\">dmidecode</emphasis> (under root)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:3 +msgid "Software Packages Update" +msgstr "軟體包更新" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:5 +msgid "MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:10 +msgid "MageiaUpdate.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-update</" +"emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software management.</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:20 +msgid "" +"To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with drakrpm-" +"editmedia with some media checked as updates. If they are not, you are " +"prompted to do so." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:25 +msgid "" +"As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and lists " +"those with an update available in the repositories. They are all selected by " +"default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on the " +"<guibutton>Update</guibutton> button to start the process." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:30 +msgid "" +"By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower half of " +"the window. The print<emphasis role=\"bold\"> ></emphasis> before a title " +"means you can click to drop down a text." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:38 en/mgaapplet-config.xml:21 +msgid "MageiaUpdate1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:35 +msgid "" +"When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you by " +"displaying this red icon <placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/" +"> . Just click and enter the user password to update the system alike." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:5 +msgid "Boot" +msgstr "開機" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:10 +msgid "mcc-boot.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:16 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot " +"steps. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:19 +msgid "Configure boot steps" +msgstr "設定開機過程" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:21 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakautologin\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakboot\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:29 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakedm\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:12 en/MCC.xml:4 +msgid "Mageia Control Center" +msgstr "Mageia 控制中心" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:14 +msgid "The tools to configure the Mageia system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <book><info><cover><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:17 +msgid "mageia-2013.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:21 en/MCC.xml:6 +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:24 en/MCC.xml:9 +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:26 en/MCC.xml:11 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:" +"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</" +"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:4 +msgid "Hardware" +msgstr "硬體" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-hardware.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:15 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your " +"hardware. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:20 +msgid "Manage your hardware" +msgstr "管理您的硬體" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:22 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"harddrake2\"/><emphasis> = Browse and configure hardware</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:27 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksound\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:34 +msgid "Configure graphics" +msgstr "設定顯示" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:36 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"drak3d\"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop effects</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:41 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"XFdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:48 +msgid "Configure mouse and keyboard" +msgstr "設定滑鼠與鍵盤" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:50 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"keyboarddrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:54 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"mousedrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:61 +msgid "Configure printing and scanning" +msgstr "設定印表機與掃描器" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:63 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"system-config-printer\"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s), " +"the print job queues, ...</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:68 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"scannerdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:75 en/mcc-network.xml:58 +msgid "Others" +msgstr "其他" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:77 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakups\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:3 +msgid "About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:6 +msgid "" +"The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options or tabs to " +"choose from in the left column, and even ten if the drakwizard package was " +"installed. Each of these tabs gives a different set of tools that can be " +"selected in the big right panel." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:8 +msgid "" +"The ten following chapters are about those ten options and the related tools." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:10 +msgid "" +"The last chapter is about some other Mageia tools, that cannot be chosen in " +"any of the MCC tabs." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:12 +msgid "" +"The titles of the pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool " +"screens." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:14 +msgid "" +"There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on " +"the \"Search\" tab in the left column." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:6 en/mcc-localdisks.xml:17 +msgid "Local disks" +msgstr "本地端磁碟" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:11 +msgid "mcc-localdisks.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:15 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your " +"local disks. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:18 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakdisk\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--removable\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:20 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--fileshare\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:4 en/mcc-networkservices.xml:17 +msgid "Network Services" +msgstr "網路服務" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-networkservices.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if " +"the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose " +"between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or " +"on <xref linkend=\"mcc-sharing\"/>to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_dhcp\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_bind\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:27 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_squid\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:31 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_ntp\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:35 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_sshd\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:4 +msgid "Network Sharing" +msgstr "網路分享" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-networksharing.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:13 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and " +"directories. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:17 +msgid "Configure Windows(R) shares" +msgstr "設定 Windows(R) 分享" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:18 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--smb\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"draksambashare\"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and " +"directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:22 +msgid "Configure NFS shares" +msgstr "設定 NFS 分享" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--nfs\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:24 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknfs\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:27 +msgid "Configure WebDAV shares" +msgstr "設定 WebDAV 分享" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:28 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--dav\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:3 +msgid "Network and Internet" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:8 +msgid "mcc-network.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:12 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link " +"below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:18 +msgid "Manage your network devices" +msgstr "管理您的網路裝置" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:21 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:29 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect--del\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:36 +msgid "Personalize and Secure your network" +msgstr "自訂並保全您的網路" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:39 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakproxy\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:43 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakgw\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:47 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetprofile\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:51 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakvpn\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:61 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:5 en/mcc-security.xml:18 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "保全" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:10 +msgid "mcc-security.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:16 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a " +"link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"msecgui\"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, " +"permissions and audit</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfirewall\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:29 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksec\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:33 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakinvictus\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:37 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakguard\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:4 en/mcc-sharing.xml:17 +msgid "Sharing" +msgstr "共享" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-sharing.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only " +"visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can " +"choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link " +"below or on <xref linkend=\"mcc-networkservices\"/>to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_proftpd\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_apache2\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:3 +msgid "System" +msgstr "系統" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:7 +msgid "mcc-system.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:10 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several system and administration " +"tools. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:14 +msgid "Manage system services" +msgstr "管理系統服務" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:16 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakauth\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakxservices\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:22 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfont\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:28 +msgid "Localization" +msgstr "地區化" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:30 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakclock\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:33 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"localedrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:39 +msgid "Administration tools" +msgstr "管理工具" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:41 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"logdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:44 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconsole\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:47 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"userdrake\"/><emphasis> = Manage users on system</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:50 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"transfugdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:3 +msgid "Configure updates frequency" +msgstr "設定更新頻率" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:5 +msgid "mgaapplet-config" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:10 +msgid "mgaapplet-config.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software management</" +"emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click / Updates " +"configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject" +"\" id=\"1\"/> in the system tray." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for " +"updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check. The " +"check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is out." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:3 +msgid "Set up the pointer device (mouse, touchpad)" +msgstr "設定游標裝置 (滑鼠、觸控板)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:6 +msgid "mousedrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:11 +msgid "mousedrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">mousedrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:20 +msgid "" +"As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by " +"Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:23 +msgid "" +"The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse " +"and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time \"Universal / Any " +"PS/2 & USB mice\" is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is " +"immediately taken into account." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:3 +msgid "MSEC: System Security and Audit" +msgstr "MSEC：系統安全與稽核" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/msecgui.xml:5 +msgid "msecgui" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:13 +msgid "msecgui.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">msecgui</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:21 +msgid "" +"msecgui<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is a graphic user interface " +"for msec that allows to configure your system security according to two " +"approaches:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:28 +msgid "" +"It sets the system behaviour, msec imposes modifications to the system to " +"make it more secure." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:33 +msgid "" +"It carries on periodic checks automatically on the system in order to warn " +"you if something seems dangerous." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:38 +msgid "" +"msec uses the concept of \"security levels\" which are intended to configure " +"a set of system permissions, which can be audited for changes or " +"enforcement. Several of them are proposed by Mageia, but you can define your " +"own customised security levels." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:45 +msgid "Overview tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:47 +msgid "See the screenshot above" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:49 +msgid "" +"The first tab takes up the list of the different security tools with a " +"button on the right side to configure them:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:54 +msgid "" +"Firewall, also found in the MCC / Security / Set up your personal firewall" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:59 +msgid "Updates, also found in MCC / Software Management / Update your system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:64 +msgid "msec itself with some information:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:68 +msgid "enabled or not" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:72 +msgid "the configured Base security level" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:76 +msgid "" +"the date of the last Periodic checks and a button to see a detailed report " +"and another button to execute the checks just now." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:86 +msgid "Security settings tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:88 +msgid "" +"A click on the second tab or on the Security <guibutton>Configure</" +"guibutton> button leads to the same screen shown below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:94 +msgid "msecgui2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:100 +msgid "Basic security tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:103 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security levels:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:106 +msgid "" +"After having checked the box <guilabel>Enable MSEC tool</guilabel>, this tab " +"allows you by a double click to choose the security level that appears then " +"in bold. If the box is not checked, the level « none » is applied. The " +"following levels are available:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:113 +msgid "" +"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">none</emphasis>. This level is intended if you " +"do not want to use msec to control system security, and prefer tuning it on " +"your own. It disables all security checks and puts no restrictions or " +"constraints on system configuration and settings. Please use this level only " +"if you are knowing what you are doing, as it would leave your system " +"vulnerable to attack." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:122 +msgid "" +"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">standard</emphasis>. This is the default " +"configuration when installed and is intended for casual users. It " +"constrains several system settings and executes daily security checks which " +"detect changes in system files, system accounts, and vulnerable directory " +"permissions. (This level is similar to levels 2 and 3 from past msec " +"versions)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:131 +msgid "" +"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">secure</emphasis>. This level is intended when " +"you want to ensure your system is secure, yet usable. It further restricts " +"system permissions and executes more periodic checks. Moreover, access to " +"the system is more restricted. (This level is similar to levels 4 (High) and " +"5 (Paranoid) from old msec versions)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:140 +msgid "" +"Besides those levels, different task-oriented security are also provided, " +"such as the <emphasis role=\"bold\">fileserver </emphasis>, <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">webserver</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"bold\">netbook</emphasis> " +"levels. Such levels attempt to pre-configure system security according to " +"the most common use cases." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:149 +msgid "" +"The last two levels called <emphasis role=\"bold\">audit_daily </emphasis> " +"and <emphasis role=\"bold\">audit_weekly</emphasis> are not really security " +"levels but rather tools for periodic checks only." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:156 +msgid "" +"These levels are saved in <filename>/etc/security/msec/level.<levelname></" +"filename>. You can define your own customised security levels, saving them " +"into specific files called <filename>level.<levelname></filename>, placed " +"into the folder <filename>/etc/security/msec/.</filename> This function is " +"intended for power users which require a customised or more secure system " +"configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:165 +msgid "" +"Keep in mind that user-modified parameters take precedence over default " +"level settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:170 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security alerts:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:173 +msgid "" +"If you check the box <guibutton>Send security alerts by email to:</" +"guibutton>, the security alerts generated by msec are going to be sent by " +"local e-mail to the security administrator named in the nearby field. You " +"can fill either a local user or a complete e-mail address (the local e-mail " +"and the e-mail manager must be set accordingly). At last, you can receive " +"the security alerts directly on your desktop. Check the relevant box to " +"enable it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><important><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:182 +msgid "" +"It is strongly advisable to enable the security alerts option in order to " +"immediately inform the security administrator of possible security problems. " +"If not, the administrator will have to regularly check the logs files " +"available in <filename>/var/log/security.</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:188 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security options:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:190 +msgid "" +"Creating a customised level is not the only way to customise the computer " +"security, it is also possible to use the tabs presented here after to change " +"any option you want. Current configuration for msec is stored in <filename>/" +"etc/security/msec/security.conf</filename>. This file contains the current " +"security level name and the list of all the modifications done to the " +"options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:199 +msgid "System security tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:201 +msgid "" +"This tab displays all the security options on the left side column, a " +"description in the centre column, and their current values on the right side " +"column." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:207 +msgid "msecgui3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:211 +msgid "" +"To modify an option, double click on it and a new window appears (see " +"screenshot below). It displays the option name, a short description, the " +"actual and default values, and a drop down list where the new value can be " +"selected. Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the " +"choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:219 +msgid "msecgui11.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:224 +msgid "" +"Do not forget when leaving msecgui to save definitively your configuration " +"using the menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you " +"have changed the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before " +"saving them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:232 +msgid "msecgui10.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:238 +msgid "Network security" +msgstr "網路安全性" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:240 +msgid "" +"This tab displays all the network options and works like the previous tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:245 +msgid "msecgui4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:251 +msgid "Periodic checks tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:253 +msgid "" +"Periodic checks aim to inform the security administrator by means of " +"security alerts of all situations msec thinks potentially dangerous." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:257 +msgid "" +"This tab displays all the periodic checks done by msec and their frequency " +"if the box <guibutton>Enable periodic security checks</guibutton> is " +"checked. Changes are done like in the previous tabs." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:264 +msgid "msecgui5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:270 +msgid "Exceptions tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:272 +msgid "" +"Sometimes alert messages are due to well known and wanted situations. In " +"these cases they are useless and wasted time for the administrator. This tab " +"allows you to create as many exceptions as you want to avoid unwanted alert " +"messages. It is obviously empty at the first msec start. The screenshot " +"below shows four exceptions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:280 +msgid "msecgui6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:284 +msgid "" +"To create an exception, click on the <guibutton>Add a rule</guibutton> button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:289 +msgid "msecgui7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:293 +msgid "" +"Select the wanted periodic check in the drop down list called " +"<guilabel>Check</guilabel> and then, enter the <guilabel>Exception</" +"guilabel> in the text area. Adding an exception is obviously not definitive, " +"you can either delete it using the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button of " +"the <guilabel>Exceptions</guilabel> tab or modify it with a double clicK." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:303 +msgid "Permissions" +msgstr "權限" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:304 +msgid "" +"This tab is intended for file and directory permissions checking and " +"enforcement." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:306 +msgid "" +"Like for the security, msec owns different permissions levels (standard, " +"secure, ..), they are enabled accordingly with the chosen security level. " +"You can create your own customised permissions levels, saving them into " +"specific files called <filename>perm.<levelname> </filename> placed into " +"the folder <filename>/etc/security/msec/</filename> . This function is " +"intended for power users which require a customised configuration. It is " +"also possible to use the tab presented here after to change any permission " +"you want. Current configuration is stored in <filename>/etc/security/msec/" +"perms.conf.</filename> This file contains the list of all the modifications " +"done to the permissions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:318 +msgid "msecgui8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:321 +msgid "" +"Default permissions are visible as a list of rules (a rule per line). You " +"can see on the left side, the file or folder concerned by the rule, then the " +"owner, then the group and then the permissions given by the rule. If, for a " +"given rule:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:327 +msgid "" +"the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is not checked, msec only checks if the " +"defined permissions for this rule are respected and sends an alert message " +"if not, but does not change anything." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:333 +msgid "" +"the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is checked, then msec will rule the " +"permissions respect at the first periodic check and overwrite the " +"permissions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><important><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:337 +msgid "" +"For this to work, the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Periodic check tab</emphasis> must be configured accordingly." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:339 +msgid "" +"To create a new rule, click on the <guibutton> Add a rule</guibutton> button " +"and fill the fields as shown in the example below. The joker * is allowed in " +"the <guilabel>File</guilabel> field. “current” means no modification." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:345 +msgid "msecgui9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:348 +msgid "" +"Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the choice and do " +"not forget when leaving to save definitively your configuration using the " +"menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you have changed " +"the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before saving them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:353 +msgid "" +"It is also possible to create or modify the rules by editing the " +"configuration file <filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:356 +msgid "" +"Changes in the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Permission tab</emphasis> (or " +"directly in the configuration file) are taken into account at the first " +"periodic check (see the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Periodic checks tab</emphasis>). If you want them to be taken immediately " +"into account, use the msecperms command in a console with root rights. You " +"can use before, the msecperms -p command to know the permissions that will " +"be changed by msecperms." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:363 +msgid "" +"Do not forget that if you modify the permissions in a console or in a file " +"manager, for a file where the box <guilabel>Enforce </guilabel> is checked " +"in the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Permissions tab </emphasis>, msecgui will " +"write the old permissions back after a while, accordingly to the " +"configuration of the options CHECK_PERMS and CHECK_PERMS_ENFORCE in the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Periodic Checks tab </emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:4 +msgid "Other Mageia Tools" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:7 +msgid "" +"There are more Mageia tools than those that can be started in the Mageia " +"Control Center. Click on a link below to learn more, or continue reading the " +"next pages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:11 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakbug\"/><emphasis>drakbug</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:16 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakbug_report\"/><emphasis>drakbug_report </emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:21 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"lsnetdrake\"/><emphasis>TO BE WRITTEN </emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"lspcidrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:29 +msgid "And more tools?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:3 +msgid "Software Management (Install and Remove Software)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:6 +msgid "rpmdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:11 +msgid "rpmdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:18 +msgid "Introduction to rpmdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">rpmdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:20 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>, also known as drakrpm, " +"is a program for installing, uninstalling and updating packages. It is the " +"graphical user interface of URPMI. At each start up, it will check online " +"package lists (called 'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official " +"servers, and will show you each time the latest applications and packages " +"available for your computer. A filter system allows you to display only " +"certain types of packages: you may display only installed applications (by " +"default), or only available updates. You can also view only not installed " +"packages. You can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries " +"of descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names " +"included in the packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:35 +msgid "" +"To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with <xref linkend=" +"\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/> ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><important><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:43 +msgid "rpmdrake8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><important><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:38 +msgid "" +"During the installation, the configured repository is the medium used for " +"the installation, generally the DVD or CD. If you keep this medium, rpmdrake " +"will ask it each time you want to install a package, with this pop-up " +"window : <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>If the above message " +"annoys you and you have a good internet connection without too strict " +"download limit, it is wise to remove that medium and replace it by online " +"repositories thanks to <xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/> ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><important><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:49 +msgid "" +"Moreover, the online repositories are always up to date, contains much more " +"packages, and allow to update your installed packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:55 +msgid "The main parts of the screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:60 +msgid "rpmdrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:67 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Package type filter:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:69 +msgid "" +"This filter allows you to display only certain types of packages. The first " +"time you start the manager, it only displays applications with a graphical " +"interface. You can display either all the packages and all their " +"dependencies and libraries or only package groups such as applications only, " +"updates only or backported packages from newer versions of Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:77 +msgid "" +"The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or Mageia, who " +"probably do not want command line or specialist tools. Since you're reading " +"this documentation, you're obviously interested in improving your knowledge " +"of Mageia, so it is best to set this filter to \"All\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<firstterm> <emphasis role=\"bold\">Package state filter:</emphasis> </" +"firstterm>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:89 +msgid "" +"This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only the " +"packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both installed and " +"not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:95 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Search mode:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:97 +msgid "" +"Click on this icon to search through the package names, through their " +"summaries, through their complete description or through the files included " +"in the packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:103 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">\"Find\" box:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:105 +msgid "" +"Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than one keyword " +"for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for \"mplayer\" and " +"\"xine\" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:111 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Erase all:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:113 +msgid "" +"This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in the \"Find\" " +"box ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:118 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Categories list:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:120 +msgid "" +"This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear categories and " +"sub categories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:125 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Description panel:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:127 +msgid "" +"This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete " +"description. It displays many useful elements about the selected package. It " +"can also show precise details about the package, the files included in the " +"package as well as a list of the last changes made by the maintainer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:137 +msgid "The status column" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:139 +msgid "" +"Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software either by " +"category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using area 4. A " +"list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the chosen medium " +"is shown with different status markers according to whether each package is " +"installed/not installed/an update... To change this status, just check or " +"uncheck the box before the package name and click on <guibutton>Apply</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:155 +msgid "Icon" +msgstr "圖示" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:157 +msgid "Legend" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:165 +msgid "../rpmdrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:169 +msgid "This package is already installed" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:175 +msgid "../rpmdrake3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:179 +msgid "This package will be installed" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:185 +msgid "../rpmdrake4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:189 +msgid "This package cannot be modified" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:195 +msgid "../rpmdrake5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:199 +msgid "This package is an update" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:205 +msgid "../rpmdrake6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:209 +msgid "This package will be uninstalled" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:147 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"table\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:215 +msgid "Examples in the screenshot above:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:219 +msgid "" +"If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed), the status " +"icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be uninstalled when clicking " +"on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:227 +msgid "" +"If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status), the orange " +"with a down arrow status icon will appear and it will be installed when " +"clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:235 +msgid "The dependencies" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:240 +msgid "rpmdrake7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:245 +msgid "" +"Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to work. They " +"are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake displays an " +"information window allowing you to choose whether to accept the selected " +"dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information (see above). It " +"may also happen that various packages are able to provide the needed " +"library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of alternatives with a " +"button to get more information and another button to choose which package to " +"install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:10 +msgid "Set up scanner" +msgstr "設定掃描器" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:11 +msgid "scannerdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:18 +msgid "Installation" +msgstr "安裝" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing " +"<emphasis>scannerdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure " +"a single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. " +"It also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a " +"remote computer or to access remote scanners." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:29 +msgid "" +"When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following " +"message:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>\"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:35 +msgid "<emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?\"</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install <code>scanner-" +"gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:44 +msgid "scannerdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:50 +msgid "" +"If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see " +"the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance, " +"<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:55 +msgid "" +"In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner " +"sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref linkend=" +"\"scannersharing\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:59 +msgid "" +"However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its " +"cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new " +"scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a " +"scanner manually</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the " +"list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:69 +msgid "scannerdrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:76 +msgid "" +"If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click <emphasis>Cancel</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:79 +msgid "" +"Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link xlink:href=" +"\"http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html\">SANE: Supported " +"Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link xlink:href=\"http://forums." +"mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:87 +msgid "Choose port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:91 +msgid "scannerdrake3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=" +"\"1\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:97 +msgid "" +"You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available ports</" +"emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that case, " +"select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:102 +msgid "" +"After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen " +"similar to the one below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:104 +msgid "" +"If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref linkend=" +"\"scannerextrasteps\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:108 +msgid "scannerdrake4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:117 +msgid "Scannersharing" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:122 +msgid "scannerdrake5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be " +"accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also " +"decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on " +"this machine." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:133 +msgid "" +"Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or " +"deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on " +"this computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:137 +msgid "" +"Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted " +"from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:143 +msgid "scannerdrake6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:149 +msgid "Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:153 +msgid "scannerdrake7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:159 +msgid "" +"Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote " +"machines." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:164 +msgid "scannerdrake8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:170 +msgid "\"All remote machines\" are allowed to access the local scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:175 +msgid "scannerdrake9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:181 +msgid "" +"If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool " +"offers to do it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:184 +msgid "At the end, the tool will alter these files:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:186 +msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:188 +msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:190 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive " +"\"net\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:193 +msgid "" +"It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and <emphasis>xinetd</" +"emphasis> to be started on boot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:199 en/system-config-printer.xml:278 +msgid "Specifics" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:205 +msgid "Hewlett-Packard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:207 +msgid "" +"Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis> " +"(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow " +"you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device Manager</" +"emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:214 +msgid "Epson" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:216 +msgid "" +"Drivers are available from <link xlink:href=\"http://download.ebz.epson.net/" +"dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this page</link>. When indicated, you must " +"install the <emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then " +"<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the " +"<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a conflict " +"with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this warning can be " +"ignored." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:231 +msgid "Extra installation steps" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:234 +msgid "" +"It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref " +"linkend=\"choosescannerport\"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra " +"steps to correctly configure your scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:239 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded " +"each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device, " +"after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the " +"firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you " +"downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:241 +msgid "" +"When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at " +"each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:246 +msgid "" +"Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the <emphasis>/etc/sane.d/" +"\"name_of_your_SANE_backend\".conf file.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:250 +msgid "" +"Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know " +"what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link xlink:href=\"http://" +"forums.mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/software-management.xml:5 en/software-management.xml:15 +msgid "Software Management" +msgstr "軟體管理" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/software-management.xml:10 +msgid "software-management.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:14 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools for software management. " +"Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:17 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"MageiaUpdate\"></xref><emphasis> = Update your system</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"mgaapplet-config\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media " +"sources for install and update</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:8 +msgid "Install and configure a printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:11 +msgid "system-config-printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:16 +msgid "system-config-printer.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own <link " +"ns2:title=\"CUPS\" ns2:href=\"http://localhost:631\">configuration " +"interface</link> which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia " +"offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer " +"which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu " +"and openSUSE." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:30 +msgid "" +"You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the " +"installation, because some drivers may only be available in this way." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:37 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>system-" +"config-printer</emphasis>. The root password will be asked for." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:34 +msgid "" +"Printer installation is carried out in the <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> " +"section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select the <guilabel>Configure " +"printing and scanning</guilabel> tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/" +">." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:42 +msgid "MCC will ask for the installation two packages:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:45 +msgid "task-printing-server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:47 +msgid "task-printing-hp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:50 +msgid "" +"It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB of " +"dependencies are needed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:53 +msgid "" +"To add a printer, choose the \"Add\" printer button. The system will try to " +"detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot displays a " +"printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected, such as a " +"printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line. The window " +"will also attempt to configure a network printer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:61 +msgid "Automatically detected printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:63 +msgid "" +"This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds the " +"name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click \"Next" +"\". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be " +"automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known " +"drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in the " +"next paragraph. Continue with <xref linkend=\"terminate\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:72 +msgid "No automatically detected printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:76 +msgid "printer3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:80 +msgid "" +"When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays a window " +"to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the following " +"options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:86 +msgid "Select printer from database" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:92 +msgid "provide PPD file" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:98 +msgid "search for a driver to download" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:102 +msgid "" +"By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer manufacturer " +"first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If more than one " +"driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless you have " +"encountered some problems with that one before, in this case select the one " +"which know to work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:110 +msgid "Complete the installation process" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:112 +msgid "" +"After the driver selection, a window requests some information which will " +"allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first line is " +"the name under which the device will appear in applications in the list of " +"available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test page. After " +"this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of available " +"printers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:121 +msgid "Network printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:123 +msgid "" +"Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired or " +"wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are attached to " +"another workstation that serves as printserver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always associate a fixed " +"IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course that should be the same " +"as the IP address the printer of printserver is set to, if it has a fixed " +"one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:134 +msgid "" +"The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or " +"printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a " +"configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a label " +"on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to a " +"Mageia system, you can run <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis> on it " +"as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and letters " +"after \"HWaddr\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:142 +msgid "" +"You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to talk to " +"your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol to choose, " +"you can try the <guilabel>Network Printer</guilabel> - <guilabel>Find " +"Network Printer</guilabel> option in the <guilabel>Devices</guilabel> menu " +"and give the IP address of the printer in the box on the right, where it " +"says \"host\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:149 +msgid "" +"If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose a " +"protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the " +"list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the list." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:154 +msgid "" +"Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver to find " +"which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue names." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:160 +msgid "Network printing protocols" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:162 +msgid "" +"One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known as " +"JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the network " +"via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the printer is " +"known on the network. This technique is also used inside some ADSL-routers " +"which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this case, the IP-" +"address is that of the router. Note that the tool \"Hp Device manager\" can " +"manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like <emphasis>hp:/" +"net/<name-of-the-printer></emphasis> . In this case, fixed IP-adress is " +"not required." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:172 +msgid "" +"Choose the option <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> as the " +"protocol and set the address in <guilabel>Host:</guilabel>, do not change " +"the <guilabel>Port Number</guilabel>, unless you know that it needs to be " +"changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver is " +"the same as above." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:180 +msgid "printer5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:184 +msgid "The other protocols are:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:188 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipp)</emphasis>: a printer which can " +"be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for example a printer " +"connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may also be used also by " +"some ADSL-routers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:197 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (https): </emphasis>the same as ipp, " +"but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol. The port has to be " +"defined. By default, the port 631 is used." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:205 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): </emphasis>the same as ipp, but " +"with TLS secured protocol." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:212 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>LPD/LPR host or Printer</emphasis>: a printer which can be " +"accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example a printer " +"connected to a station using LPD." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:220 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Windows printer via SAMBA</emphasis>: a printer connected to a " +"station running Windows or a SMB server and shared." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:226 +msgid "" +"The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to form " +"the URI:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:231 +msgid "Appsocket" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:233 +msgid "<uri>socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port </uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:237 +msgid "Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:239 +msgid "<uri>ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:241 +msgid "<uri>http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:245 +msgid "Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:247 +msgid "<uri>lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue</uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:251 +msgid "" +"Additional information can be found in the <link ns2:href=\"http://www.cups." +"org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html\">CUPS documentation.</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:256 +msgid "Device Properties" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:258 +msgid "" +"You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access to " +"parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on your " +"system, but you can specify a different one with the <guimenu>Server</" +"guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Connect...</guimenuitem> menu, another window which " +"gives access to the tuning of other specific parameters of the server, " +"following <guimenu>Server</guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Settings.</guimenuitem>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:268 +msgid "Troubleshoot" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:270 +msgid "" +"You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by " +"inspecting <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:273 +msgid "" +"You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the <guimenu>Help</" +"guimenu> | <guilabel>Troubleshoot</guilabel> menu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:280 +msgid "" +"It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not available in " +"Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at the <link ns2:" +"href=\"http://openprinting.org/printers/\">openprinting</link> site to check " +"if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if the package is " +"already present in Mageia and in this case install it manually. Then, redo " +"the installation process to configure the printer. In all cases, report the " +"problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are comfortable with this tool " +"and furnish the model and driver information and whether the printer works " +"or not after installation. Here are some sources to find other up-to-date " +"drivers or for more recent devices." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:292 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Brother printers</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:294 +msgid "" +"<link ns2:href=\"http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/" +"en/download_prn.html\">This page</link> give a list of drivers provided by " +"Brother. Search the driver for your device, download the rpm(s) and install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:298 +msgid "" +"You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration utility." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:301 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one devices</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:304 +msgid "" +"These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically after the " +"detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other information " +"<link ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html\">here</" +"link>. The tool \"HP Device Manager\" is available in the <guilabel>System</" +"guilabel> menu. Also view <link ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-" +"web/install/manual/hp_setup.html\">configuration</link> for the management " +"of the printer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:311 +msgid "" +"A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the scanner " +"features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface doesn't " +"allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate). In this " +"case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save the " +"picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device. Afterwards, " +"open your favourite imaging software and load your picture from the memory " +"card which is appeared in the /media folder." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:319 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Samsung colour printer</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:321 +msgid "" +"For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, <link ns2:href=\"http://" +"foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/\">this site provides drivers</link> for the QPDL " +"protocol." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:324 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Epson printers and scanners</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:326 +msgid "" +"Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link ns2:href=\"http://" +"download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this search page</" +"link>. For the scanner part, you must install the \"iscan-data\" package " +"first, then \"iscan\" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also be " +"available and is to install. Choose the <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages " +"according to your architecture." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:332 +msgid "" +"It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a " +"conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:336 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Canon printers</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:338 +msgid "" +"For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named turboprint " +"<link ns2:href=\"http://www.turboprint.info/\">available here </link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:9 +msgid "Import Windows(TM) documents and settings" +msgstr "匯入 Windows® 文件與設定" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:12 +msgid "transfugdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:17 +msgid "transfugdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">transfugdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center " +"labeled <guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings " +"from a <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark " +"class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark class=\"registered" +"\">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark> installation on the same " +"computer as the Mageia installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake " +"immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:37 +msgid "" +"After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some " +"explanation about the tool and import options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:40 +msgid "" +"As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of " +"<trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:44 +msgid "" +"When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to " +"choose accounts in <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> and " +"Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account " +"than yours own." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:51 +msgid "transfugdrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:56 +msgid "" +"Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of " +"transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</" +"trademark> user account names with special symbols can be displayed " +"incorrectly." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:62 +msgid "" +"Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:67 +msgid "" +"Some <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> applications " +"(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For " +"example, NVidia drivers in <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</" +"trademark>are updated using <emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not " +"use such accounts for the import purposes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:74 +msgid "" +"When you finished with the accounts selection press <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import " +"documents:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:80 +msgid "transfugdrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:84 +msgid "" +"Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</" +"trademark> data from <emphasis>My Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</" +"emphasis> and <emphasis>My Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to " +"skip import by selecting the appropriate item in this window." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:89 +msgid "" +"When you finished with the document import method choosing press " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method " +"to import bookmarks:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:95 +msgid "transfugdrake3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:99 +msgid "" +"Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and " +"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia " +"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:103 +msgid "" +"Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> " +"button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:112 +msgid "The next page allows you to import desktop background:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:116 +msgid "transfugdrake4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:120 +msgid "" +"Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:123 +msgid "" +"The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the " +"<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:128 +msgid "transfugdrake5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/userdrake.xml:11 +msgid "Users and Groups" +msgstr "使用者與群組" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/userdrake.xml:13 +msgid "userdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:18 +msgid "userdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:23 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">userdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center " +"labelled \"Manage users on system\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this " +"means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings " +"(ID, shell, ...)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in " +"the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the " +"<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:35 +msgid "<guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:37 +msgid "This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:41 +msgid "userdrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:45 +msgid "" +"The field <emphasis role=\"bold\">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the " +"entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything " +"or nothing as well!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:49 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login</emphasis> is the only required field." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:52 +msgid "" +"Setting a <emphasis role=\"bold\">Password</emphasis> is highly recommended. " +"There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the password is weak, " +"too short or is too similar to the login name. You should use figures, lower " +"and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The shield will turn " +"orange and then green as the password strength improves." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:59 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure " +"you entered what you intended to." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:62 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that " +"allows you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options " +"are Bash, Dash and Sh." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:66 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if " +"checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new " +"user as the only member (this may be edited)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:70 +msgid "" +"The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately " +"after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:73 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">2 Add Group</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:75 +msgid "" +"You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific " +"group ID." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:78 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:80 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given " +"for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:83 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Account Info</emphasis>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:87 +msgid "userdrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:91 +msgid "" +"The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account. " +"Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary " +"accounts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:95 +msgid "" +"The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long " +"as the account is locked." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:98 +msgid "It is also possible to change the icon." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:100 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an " +"expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his " +"password periodically." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:106 +msgid "userdrake3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:110 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups " +"that the user is a member of." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:114 +msgid "" +"If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be " +"effective until his/her next login." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:118 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:120 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the " +"group name." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:123 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the " +"users who are members of the group" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:126 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">5 Delete</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis role=\"bold\">Delete</" +"emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to ask if home " +"directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group has been " +"created for the user, it will be deleted as well." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:133 +msgid "It is possible to delete a group which is not empty." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:136 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">6 Refresh</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:138 +msgid "" +"The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to " +"refresh the display." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:141 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">7 Guest Account</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:143 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is " +"intended to give somebody temporary access to the system with total " +"security. Login is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to " +"make modifications to the system from this account. The personal directories " +"are deleted at the end of the session. This account is enabled by default, " +"to disable it, click in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest " +"account</guimenu>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:3 +msgid "Set up the graphical server" +msgstr "設定圖形伺服器" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:5 +msgid "XFdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:10 +msgid "XFdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:17 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>XFdrake</" +"emphasis> as normal user or <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> as root. Mind the " +"capital letters." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>. Select <emphasis><guilabel>Set up the " +"graphical server</guilabel></emphasis>. <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=" +"\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:24 +msgid "The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:26 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphic card</emphasis>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:28 +msgid "" +"The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching server " +"configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for example " +"one with a proprietary driver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:32 +msgid "" +"The available servers are sorted under <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> by " +"manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical " +"order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under<guilabel> " +"Xorg</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:38 +msgid "" +"In case of problems, <emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis> will work with most " +"graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while " +"in your Desktop Environment." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:42 +msgid "" +"If even Vesa doesn't work, choose <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> - " +"<guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, which is used while installing " +"Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:47 +msgid "" +"If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you want to " +"use a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for example)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:53 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Monitor:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:55 +msgid "" +"In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and " +"you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor " +"isn't in the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> list, choose in the " +"<guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list a monitor with the same features." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:62 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Resolution:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:64 +msgid "" +"This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and the " +"colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:69 +msgid "XFdrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:67 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>When you change the color depth, " +"a multi-colored bar will appear next to the second button and show a preview " +"of what the selected color depth looks like." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:75 +msgid "" +"The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for another " +"one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the graphic card " +"and the monitor, it is possible to click on <guilabel>Other</guilabel> to " +"set other resolutions, but bear in mind that you can damage your monitor or " +"select an uncomfortable setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:81 +msgid "" +"The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change this for " +"another one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:85 +msgid "" +"Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout and " +"restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:92 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Test:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:94 +msgid "" +"Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before clicking " +"on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if the " +"graphical environment doesn't work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:99 +msgid "" +"In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2 to open a " +"text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the caps) to to use " +"XFdrake's text version." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:102 +msgid "" +"If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you don't want " +"to change after all, click on <guibutton>No</guibutton>, if everything is " +"right, click on <guibutton role=\"bold\">OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:107 +msgid "Options:" +msgstr "選項：" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:110 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Global options</guilabel>: If <emphasis>Disable Ctrl-Alt-" +"Backspace</emphasis> is checked, it will no longer be possible to restart X " +"server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:116 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Graphic card options</guilabel>: Allows you to enable or disable " +"three specific features depending on the graphic card." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:121 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Graphical interface at startup</guilabel>: Most of the time, " +"<emphasis>Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon booting</" +"emphasis> is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it may be " +"unchecked for a server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:128 +msgid "" +"After a click on the <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> button, the system will ask " +"you to confirm. There is still time to cancel everything and keep the " +"previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect " +"and reconnect to activate the new configuration." +msgstr "" diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/MCC-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/MCC-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8bcdaa33 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/MCC-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="MCC"> + + <info> + <title>Mageia 控制中心</title> + <cover> + <para role="tagline">The tools to configure the Mageia system</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="mageia-2013.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>. + </para> + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>. + </para> + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + <article> + +<xi:include href="mcc-intro.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="software-management.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-sharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networkservices.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-hardware.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-network.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-system.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networksharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-localdisks.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-security.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-boot.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="otherMageiaTools.xml"></xi:include> + +</article> +</book> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/MCC.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/MCC.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6f5d1681 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/MCC.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="MCC"> + + <info> + <title>Mageia 控制中心</title> + <cover> + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>. + </para> + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>. + </para> + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + +<xi:include href="mcc-intro.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="software-management.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-sharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networkservices.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-hardware.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-network.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-system.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networksharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-localdisks.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-security.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-boot.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="otherMageiaTools.xml"></xi:include> + +</article> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/MageiaUpdate.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/MageiaUpdate.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cd10f899 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/MageiaUpdate.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="MageiaUpdate"> + <info> + <title xml:id="MageiaUpdate-ti1">軟體包更新</title> + + <subtitle>MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="MageiaUpdate-im1" align="center" fileref="MageiaUpdate.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> or <emphasis +role="bold">drakrpm-update</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Software +management.</emphasis></para> + + <para><note> + <para>To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with +drakrpm-editmedia with some media checked as updates. If they are not, you +are prompted to do so.</para> + </note></para> + + <para>As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and lists +those with an update available in the repositories. They are all selected by +default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on the +<guibutton>Update</guibutton> button to start the process.</para> + + <para>By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower half of +the window. The print<emphasis role="bold"> ></emphasis> before a title +means you can click to drop down a text.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you by +displaying this red icon <inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject> +. Just click and enter the user password to update the system alike.</para> + </note></para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/XFdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/XFdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aba2c49e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/XFdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="XFdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="XFdrake-ti1">設定圖形伺服器</title> + + <subtitle>XFdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="XFdrake-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="XFdrake.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis +role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>. Select <emphasis><guilabel>Set up the +graphical server</guilabel></emphasis>. <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing +<emphasis>XFdrake</emphasis> as normal user or <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> +as root. Mind the capital letters.</para> + </footnote></para> + + <para/> + + <para>The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Graphic card</emphasis>:</para> + + <para>The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching server +configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for example +one with a proprietary driver.</para> + + <para>The available servers are sorted under <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> by +manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical +order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under<guilabel> +Xorg</guilabel>.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>In case of problems, <emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis> will work with most +graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while +in your Desktop Environment.</para> + + <para>If even Vesa doesn't work, choose <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> - +<guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, which is used while installing +Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates.</para> + </note>If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you want to +use a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for +example).</para> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Monitor:</emphasis></para> + + <para>In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and +you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor +isn't in the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> list, choose in the +<guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list a monitor with the same features.</para> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Resolution:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and the +colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen:</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="XFdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>When you change the color depth, a +multi-colored bar will appear next to the second button and show a preview +of what the selected color depth looks like.</para> + + <para>The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for another +one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the graphic card +and the monitor, it is possible to click on <guilabel>Other</guilabel> to +set other resolutions, but bear in mind that you can damage your monitor or +select an uncomfortable setting.</para> + + <para>The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change this for +another one.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout and +restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect.</para> + </note></para> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Test:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before clicking +on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if the +graphical environment doesn't work.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2 to open a +text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the caps) to to use +XFdrake's text version.</para> + </note>If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you don't want +to change after all, click on <guibutton>No</guibutton>, if everything is +right, click on <guibutton role="bold">OK</guibutton>.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <title>選項：</title> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Global options</guilabel>: If <emphasis>Disable +Ctrl-Alt-Backspace</emphasis> is checked, it will no longer be possible to +restart X server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Graphic card options</guilabel>: Allows you to enable or disable +three specific features depending on the graphic card.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Graphical interface at startup</guilabel>: Most of the time, +<emphasis>Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon +booting</emphasis> is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it +may be unchecked for a server.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <para>After a click on the <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> button, the system will ask +you to confirm. There is still time to cancel everything and keep the +previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect +and reconnect to activate the new configuration.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/diskdrake--dav.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/diskdrake--dav.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d365701e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/diskdrake--dav.xml @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="diskdrake--dav" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--dav-ti1">存取 WebDAV 分享的磁碟機與目錄</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --dav</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="diskdrake--dav1.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--dav-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found in the Mageia +Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure +WebDAV shares</guilabel>.</para> + + <section> + <title>前言</title> + + <para><link xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV">WebDAV</link> is a +protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it +appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a +WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV +server.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Creating a new entry</title> + + <para>The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if +any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new +entry. Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen.</para> + + <para>Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions. Continue +with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking +<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the +<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct +it, if needed.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount +point.</para> + + <para>In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other +options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the +access.</para> + + <para>After you accepted the configuration with the radio button +<guibutton>Done</guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and your +new mount point is listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you +are asked whether or not to save the modifications in +<emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose this option if you want that the +remote directory is available at each boot. If your configuration is for +one-time usage, do not save it.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/diskdrake--fileshare.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/diskdrake--fileshare.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7fbd29a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/diskdrake--fileshare.xml @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-ti1">分享您的硬碟分割區</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --fileshare</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--fileshare.png" revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-im1" align="center" format="PNG" /> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This simple tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> allows you, the +administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home +subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have +computers running either Linux or Windows operating system.</para> + + <para>It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab, labelled +"Share your hard disk partitions".</para> + + <para>First, answer the question : "<guilabel>Would you like to allow users to +share some of their directories ?</guilabel>", click on <guibutton>No +sharing</guibutton> if the answer is no for all users, click on +<guibutton>Allow all users</guibutton> for all users and click on +<guibutton>Custom</guibutton> if the answer is no for some users and yes for +the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their +directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically +created by the system. You will be asked about this later.</para> + + <para>Click on <guilabel>OK</guilabel>, a second screen appears which asks you +choose between <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> or <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. +Check <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> if Linux is the only operating system on +the network, check <guibutton>SMB</guibutton> if the network includes both +Linux and Windows machines and then click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Any +required packages will be installed if necessary.</para> + + <para>The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen. In +this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool allows +you to add users authorised to share their directories to the fileshare +group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare group, +then on <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>, In the Groups tab. Check the +fileshare group and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. For more information +about Userdrake, see <xref linkend="userdrake">this page</xref></para> + + <para/> + + <note> + <para>When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to disconnect and +reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken into account.</para> + </note> + + <para>From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in his/her +file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file managers +have this facility.</para> + +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/diskdrake--nfs.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/diskdrake--nfs.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c157fefd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/diskdrake--nfs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-ti1">存取 NFS 分享的磁碟機與目錄</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --nfs</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-im1" align="center" fileref="diskdrake--nfs.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <para>.</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>前言</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to declare some +shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The +protocol used for this is NFS which is available on most Linux or Unix +systems. The shared directory will be thus available directly at +boot. Shared directories can be also accessible directly in a single session +for a user with tools such as file browsers.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Procedure</title> + + <para>Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers +which share directories.</para> + + <para>Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the +shared directories and select the directory you want to access.</para> + + <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs2.png"> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The button <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> will be available and you have +to specify where to mount the directory.</para> + + <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs3.png"> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also verify and +change some options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button. After +mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same button.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>On accepting the configuration with the <guibutton>Done</guibutton> button, +a message will displayed, asking "Do you want to save the /etc/fstab +modifications". This will make the directory available at each boot, if the +network is accessible. The new directory is then available in your file +browser, for example in Dolphin.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/diskdrake--removable.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/diskdrake--removable.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ecaa8d2c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/diskdrake--removable.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="diskdrake--removable"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--removable-ti1">CD/DVD burner</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --removable</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" fileref="diskdrake--removable.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="diskdrake--removable-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote>is found under the tab Local +disks in the Mageia Control Center labelled accordingly with your removable +hardware (CD/DVD players and burners and floppy drives only). </para> + + <para>Its goal is to define the way your removable disk is mounted. </para> + + <para>At the top of the window there is a short description of your hardware and +the chosen options to mount it. Use the menu on the bottom to change +them. Check the item to be changed and then on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> +button. </para> + + <section> + <title>掛載點</title> + + <para>Check this box to change the mount point. The default one is /media/cdrom.</para> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>選項</title> + + <para>Many mount options can be chosen here either directly in the list or via the +<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> submenu. The main are:</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>user/nouser</title> + + <para>user allows an ordinary user (not root) to mount the removable disk, this +option involves noexec, nosuid and nodev. The user who mounted the disk is +the only one who can umount it. </para> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/diskdrake--smb.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/diskdrake--smb.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fb35a511 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/diskdrake--smb.xml @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="diskdrake--smb" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--smb-ti1">設定 Windows (SMB) 分享磁碟機與目錄</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --smb</subtitle> + + </info> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>前言</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to declare which +shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The +protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R) +systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared +directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with +tools such as file browsers.</para> + + <para>Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of +available servers, for example with <xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Procedure</title> + + <para>Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers who +share directories.</para> + + <para>Click on the server name and on > before the server name to display the +list of the shared directories and select the directory you want to access.</para> + + <para>The <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> button will become available, you +have to specify where to mount the directory.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the <guimenu>Mount +button</guimenu>. You can also verify and change some options with the +<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button.</para> + + <para>In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those able to +connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it +with the same button.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will ask +"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications". Saving, will allow +directory to made available at each boot, if the network is accessible. The +new directory is then available in your file browser, for example in +dolphin.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drak3d.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drak3d.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..58619d8c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drak3d.xml @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drak3d" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drak3d-ti1">3D Desktop Effects</title> + + <subtitle>drak3d</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im1" revision="1" align="center" fileref="drak3d.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>前言</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drak3d</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> lets you manage the 3D +desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by +default.</para> + </section> + + <section annotations="center"> + <title>Getting Started</title> + + <para>To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If the +package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d can +start.</para> + + <para>After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window. Here you +can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or +<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a +composite/window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special +effects for your desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn +it on.</para> + + <para>If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of +Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be +installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the +<guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button to continue.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im3" fileref="drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that Compiz +Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log back in +for the changes to take effect.</para> + + <para>After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure Compiz +Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager) tool.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>解決問題</title> + + <section> + <title>Can't See Desktop after Logging in</title> + + <para>If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into your desktop +but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back to the log in +screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select drak3d.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator, you will be +prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the administrator login +with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes that may have caused the +log in problem.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakauth.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakauth.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2218045d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakauth.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakauth" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakauth-ti1">認證方式</title> + + <subtitle>drakauth</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakauth.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakauth-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakauth</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> enables you to modify the +manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net.</para> + + <para>By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your +computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so +and give information about that.</para> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakautologin.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakautologin.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..61907c0c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakautologin.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakautologin"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakautologin-ti1">設定自動登入</title> + + <subtitle>drakautologin</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakautologin-im1" fileref="drakautologin.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakautologin</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to automatically +login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without asking for any +password. It's called autologin. This is generally a good idea when there +is only one user like to be using the machine.</para> + + <para>It is found under the <emphasis role="bold">Boot</emphasis> tab in the +Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up autologin to automatically log in".</para> + + <para>The interface buttons are pretty obvious:</para> + + <para>Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system +starts</guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the +boot. If not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be +possible to launch the graphic interface manually. This can be done by +launching the command 'startx' or 'systemctl start dm'.</para> + + <para>If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either +<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to +continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check +<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if +needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default +username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakboot.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakboot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7e9d563e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakboot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakboot" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakboot-ti1">設定系統開機</title> + + <subtitle>drakboot</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="drakboot--boot-im1" align="center" fileref="drakboot--boot.png" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If you are using a UEFI system instead of BIOS, the user interface is +slightly different as the boot device is obviously the EFI system Partition +(ESP).</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot--boot2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakboot</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to configure the +boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default boot, +etc.)</para> + + <para>It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled "Set up +boot system".</para> + + <warning> + <para>Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing. Changing +some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !</para> + </warning> + + <para>In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible if +using BIOS, to choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub, +Grub2 or Lilo, and with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question +of taste, there are no other consequences. You can also set the +<guibutton>Boot device</guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you +are an expert. The boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any +modification can prevent your machine from booting.</para> + + <para>In a UEFI system, the bootloader is <guilabel>Grub2-efi</guilabel> and is +installed in /boot/EFI partition. This FAT32 formatted partition is common +to all operating systems installed.</para> + + <para>In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set +the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in +seconds. During this delay, Grub or Lilo will display the list of available +operating systems, prompting you to make your choice. If no selection is +made, the bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses.</para> + + <para>In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is +possible to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username and +password will be asked at the boot time to select a booting entry or change +settings. The username is "root" and the password is the one chosen here.</para> + + <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton></para> + + <para>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the +power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was +the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI +compatible.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton></para> + + <para>SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for +multicore processors.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual +processor and enable SMP.</para> + </note> + + <para><guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local +APIC:</guibutton></para> + + <para>APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two +components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O +APIC. The latter one routes the interrupts it receives from peripheral buses +to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful +for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC +system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message +"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local +APIC.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen differs depending on which boot +loader you chose.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>You have Grub Legacy or Lilo:</para> + + <para>In this case, you can see the list of all the available entries at boot +time. The default one is asterisked. To change the order of the menu +entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the selected item. If you +click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> +buttons, a new window appears to add a new entry in the bootloader menu or +to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar with Lilo or Grub to be +able to use these tools.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want +to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command "title". For +example: Mageia3.</para> + + <para>The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches +the Grub command "kernel". For example /boot/vmlinuz.</para> + + <para>The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the +kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command "root". For example (hd0,1).</para> + + <para>The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to +the kernel at boot time.</para> + + <para>If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this +entry by default.</para> + + <para>In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to +choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel> +file and a <guilabel>network profile</guilabel>, see <xref +linkend="draknetprofile"/>, in the drop-down lists.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>You have Grub2 or Grub2-efi (boot loaders used by default respectively in +Legacy mode and UEFI mode):</para> + + <para>In this case, the drop-down list labelled <guilabel>Default</guilabel> +displays all the available entries; click on the one wanted as the default +one.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to +the kernel at boot time.</para> + + <para>If you have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them +to your Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, uncheck the box +<guilabel>Probe Foreign OS</guilabel></para> + + <para>In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to +choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>. If you don't want a bootable +Mageia, but to chain load it from another OS, check the box <guilabel>Do not +touch ESP or MBR</guilabel> and accept the warning.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <warning> + <para>Not installing on ESP or MBR means that the installation is not bootable +unless chain loaded from another OS.</para> + </warning> + + <para>To set many other parameters, you can use the tool named <emphasis>Grub +Customizer</emphasis>, available in the Mageia repositories (see below).</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakbug.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakbug.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0df19f08 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakbug.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section +xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" +xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" +xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" +xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakbug" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakbug-ti1">Mageia Bug Report Tool</title><subtitle>drakbug</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakbug-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" + fileref="drakbug.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Usually, this tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakbug</emphasis>.</para></footnote> starts automatically +when a Mageia tool crashes. However, it is also possible that, after filing +a bug report, you are asked to start this tool to check some of the +information it gives, and then provide that in that existing bug report.</para> + + <para>If a new bug report needs to be filed and you are not used to doing that, +then please read <link +xlink:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_report_a_bug_properly">How to +report a bug report properly</link> before clicking on the "Report" button.</para> + + <para>In case the bug has already been filed by someone else (the error message +that drakbug gave will be the same, then), it is useful to add a comment to +that existing report that you saw the bug, too.</para> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakbug_report.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakbug_report.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b76b8e73 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakbug_report.xml @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section +xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" +xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" +xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" +xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xml:id="drakbug_report" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="drakbug_report-ti1">Collect Logs and System Information for Bug Reports</title><subtitle>drakbug_report</subtitle> + </info> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakbug_report</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can only be started and used +on the command line.</para> + +<para>It is advised to write the output of this command to a file, for instance by +doing <emphasis role="bold">drakbug_report > drakbugreport.txt</emphasis>, +but make sure you have enough disk space first: the file can easily be +several GBs large.</para> +<note><para>The output is far too large to attach to a bug report without first removing +the unneeded parts.</para></note> + <para>This command collects the following information on your system:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para> lspci</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> pci_devices</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> dmidecode</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> fdisk</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> scsi</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> /sys/bus/scsi/devices</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> lsmod</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> cmdline</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> pcmcia: stab</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> usb</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> partitions</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> cpuinfo</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> syslog</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> Xorg.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> monitor_full_edid</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> stage1.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> ddebug.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> install.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> fstab</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> modprobe.conf</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> lilo.conf</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> grub: menu.lst</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> grub: install.sh</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> grub: device.map</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> xorg.conf</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> urpmi.cfg</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> modprobe.preload</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> sysconfig/i18n</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> /proc/iomem</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> /proc/ioport</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> mageia version</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> rpm -qa</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> df</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + + <note><para>At the time this help page was written, the "syslog" part of this command's +output was empty, because this tool had not yet been adjusted to our switch +to systemd. If it is still empty, you can retrieve the "syslog" by doing (as +root) <emphasis role="bold"> journalctl -a > journalctl.txt</emphasis>. If +you don't have a lot of diskspace, you can, for instance, take the last 5000 +lines of the log instead with: <emphasis role="bold">journalctl -a | tail +-n5000 > journalctl5000.txt</emphasis>.</para></note> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakclock.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakclock.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f77f9e29 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakclock.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakclock"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakclock-ti1">管理日期與時間</title> + + <subtitle>drakclock</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakclock.png" xml:id="drakclock-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakclock</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the tab System +in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>"Manage date and +time"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a +right click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray.</para> + + <para>It's a very simple tool.</para> + + <para>On the upper left part, is the <emphasis role="bold">calendar</emphasis>. On +the screenshot above, the date is September (on the upper left), 2012 (on +the upper right), the 2nd (in blue) and it is a Sunday. Select the month +(or year) by clicking on the little arrows on each side of September (or +2012). Select the day by clicking on its number.</para> + + <para>On the bottom left is the <emphasis role="bold">Network Time +Protocol</emphasis> synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on +time by synchronising it with a server. Check <guilabel>Enable Network Time +Protocol</guilabel> and choose the closest server.</para> + + <para>On the right part is the <emphasis role="bold">clock</emphasis>. It's +useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours, +minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows +to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see +your desktop environment settings for that.</para> + + <para>At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on the +<guibutton>Change Time Zone</guibutton> button and choosing in the list the +nearest town.</para> + + <note> + <para>Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they +will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation +settings.</para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakconnect--del.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakconnect--del.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..809e51c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakconnect--del.xml @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakconnect--del" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakconnect--del-ti1">移除一連線</title><subtitle>drakconnect --del</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakconnect--del-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect--del.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Here, you can delete a network interface<footnote><para>You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakconnect --del</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote>.</para> + <para>Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then +click <emphasis>next</emphasis>.</para> + <para>You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted +successfully.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakconnect.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakconnect.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..66b5a8c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakconnect.xml @@ -0,0 +1,808 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakconnect"> + <info annotations="simonnzg listened to Aicha by Khaled & Faudel whilst editing this document."> + <title xml:id="drakconnect-ti1">設定一個新的網路介面 (LAN、ISDN、ADSL、...)</title> + + <subtitle>drakconnect</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakconnect-im1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>前言</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakconnect</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows to configure much of +local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from +your access provider or your network administrator.</para> + + <para>Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which hardware +and provider you have.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Wired connection (Ethernet)</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The first window lists the interfaces which are available. Select the one +to configure.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP +address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Automatic IP</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers +are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained +below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, +the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. +The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option +<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers +have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address +from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the DHCP client</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>DHCP timeout</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server +requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP +address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection +configurations are explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>手動組態設定</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS +servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no +HOSTNAME is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is +attributed by default.</para> + + <para>For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like +<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is +<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your service provider's website.</para> + + <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search +domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your +computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is +"splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be "boatanchor.net". Unless +you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, +domestic ADSL would not need this setting.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect30.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Satellite connection (DVB)</title> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Cable modem connection</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The first window lists the interfaces which are available. Select the one +to configure.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP +address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>You have to specify a authentication method:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>無</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to provide User name +and password.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Automatic IP</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers +are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained +below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, +the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. +The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option +<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers +have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address +from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the DHCP client</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>DHCP timeout</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server +requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP +address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection +configurations are explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>手動組態設定</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS servers +to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME +is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is +attributed by default.</para> + + <para>For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like +<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is +<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your service provider's website.</para> + + <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search +domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your +computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is +"splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be "boatanchor.net". Unless +you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, +domestic connection would not need this setting.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect32.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new DSL connection</title> + + <para><orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select one and to +configure it.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select one of the protocols available:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>動態主機設定協定 (DHCP)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>手動組態設定 TCP/IP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>PPP over ADSL (PPPoA)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>點對點通道協定 (PPTP)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>連結設定</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>帳號登入 (使用者名稱)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Account password</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>(Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>(Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new ISDN connection</title> + + <para><orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The wizard asks which device to configure:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Manual choice (internal ISDN card)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>外接式 ISDN 數據機</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and +manufacturer. Select your card.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select one of the protocols available:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe (DHCP)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Protocol for Europe (EDSS1)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave +you. Then it is asked for parameters:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>連線名稱</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>電話號碼</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>登入的 ID</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Account password</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>認證方式</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by automatic or +manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and Subnet mask.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are obtained, by +automatic or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to +put:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>網域名稱</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>First and second DNS Server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to select only if you +are sure that your provider is configured to accept it.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next step is to choose how the gateway address is obtained, by automatic +or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to enter the +IP address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Wireless connection (WiFi)</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an entry for +Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure. Use ndiswrapper +only if the other configuration methods did not work.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this step, the choice is given between the different access points that +the card has detected.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect31.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Operating mode:</para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>固定的</term> + + <listitem> + <para>To access to an existing access point (the most frequent).</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Ad-Hoc</term> + + <listitem> + <para>To configure direct connection between computers.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Network Name (ESSID)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is configured.</para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>WPA/WPA2</term> + + <listitem> + <para>This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware allows it.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>WEP</term> + + <listitem> + <para>Some old hardware deals only this encryption method.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>加密金鑰</para> + + <para>It is generally provided with the hardware which give the access point.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP address or a +manual IP address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Automatic IP</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers are +declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained +below. In the last case, IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is +specified, the name localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. The +Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option +<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the DHCP client</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>DHCP timeout</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS servers</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server +requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP +address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After accepting the configuration the step, which is common to all +connection configurations, is explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>手動組態設定</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to declare DNS servers. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, +the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.</para> + + <para>For a residential network, the IP address always looks like +<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is +<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your providers website.</para> + + <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search +domain</emphasis>. It must seem to your hostname without the first name, +before the period.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection</title> + + <para><orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select one and to +configure it.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The PIN is asked. Leave empty if the PIN is not required.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Provide access settings</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>無線網路基地台名稱</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>帳號登入 (使用者名稱)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Account password</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection</title> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS)</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The wizard asks which device to configure:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>手動選擇</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Detected hardware, if any.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of ports is proposed. Select your port.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the package +<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider +gave. Then it is asked for Dialup options:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Connection name</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Phone number</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Login ID</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Password</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Authentication</emphasis>, choose between:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>PAP/CHAP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Script-based</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>PAP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Terminal-based</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>CHAP</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakconnect-end"> + <title>Ending the configuration</title> + + <para>In the next step, you can specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Allow users to manage the connection</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Start the connection at boot</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Enable traffic accounting</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is <emphasis>Allow +access point roaming</emphasis> which give the possibility to switch +automatically between access point according to the signal strength.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>With the advanced button, you can specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Metric (10 by default)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>MTU</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>網路熱插拔</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>啟用 IPv6 到 IPv4 通道</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start +immediately or not.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect9.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakconsole.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakconsole.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4e6fc635 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakconsole.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakconsole"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakconsole-ti1">以管理者身份開啟一個終端機</title> + + <subtitle>drakconsole</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakconsole-im1" fileref="drakconsole.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakconsole</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> gives you access to a console +which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more +information about that.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakdisk.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakdisk.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2115ddcc --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakdisk.xml @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakdisk"> + + + <info> + <title xml:id="drakdisk-ti1">管理磁碟分割區</title> + + <subtitle>drakdisk or diskdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskBackup-im1" revision="1" fileref="drakdiskBackup.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <warning> + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakdisk</emphasis> or <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is very powerful, a tiny +error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a +partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll +see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on +<emphasis>Exit</emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue.</para> + </warning> + + <para>If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk you +want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc).</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="drakdisk-im1" fileref="drakdisk.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your +preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions, +resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a +partition: it is all possible. The <emphasis><guibutton>Clear +all</guibutton></emphasis> button at the bottom is to erase the complete +disk, the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a +partition.</para> + + + + <!-- 2015-07-06 Note added by Lebarhon --> +<note> + <para>If you have an UEFI system, you can see a small partition called "EFI System +Partition" and mounted on /boot/EFI. Never delete it, because it contains +all your different operating systems bootloaders.</para> + </note> + + <para>If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot +choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition +must be unmounted first.</para> + + <para>It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side</para> + + <para>To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have to +delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button +<guibutton role="bold">Create</guibutton> appears when a disk empty part is +selected</para> + + <para>You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be created.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskMountedPartition-im1" revision="1" fileref="drakdiskMountedPartition.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Selecting <emphasis><guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton></emphasis> +gives some extra available actions, like labeling the partition, as can be +seen in the screenshot below.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakdiskExpertUnmounted-im1" align="center" fileref="drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakedm.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakedm.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..407b9562 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakedm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakedm"> + <info> + + <!--2012-09-03 marja: changed title to the title of this screen in MCC . 2017-04-10 simonnzg has looked and seems OK--> +<title xml:id="drakedm-ti1">設定登入管理程式</title> + <subtitle>drakedm</subtitle> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="drakedm.png" align="center" xml:id="drakedm-im1" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para xml:id="drakedm-pa1" revision="1">Here<footnote><para xml:id="drakedm-pa3" revision="1">You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakedm</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> you can choose which display +manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available +on your system will be shown.</para> + <para xml:id="drakedm-pa2" revision="1">Most users will only notice that the provided login screens look +different. However, there are differences in supported features, too. LXDM +is a lightweight display manager, SDDM and GDM have more extras.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakfirewall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakfirewall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d9a19e42 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakfirewall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakfirewall" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakfirewall-ti1">設定您的個人防火牆</title> + + <subtitle>drakfirewall</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakfirewall.png" align="center" xml:id="drakfirewall-im1" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakfirewall</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the Security +tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up your personal +firewall". It is the same tool in the first tab of "Configure system +security, permissions and audit".</para> + + <para>A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming +connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the +first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection +attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box - +<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable +the firewall, and only check the needed services.</para> + + <para>It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on +<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field +<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these +examples :</para> + + <para>80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol</para> + + <para>24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol</para> + + <para>The listed ports should be separated by a space.</para> + + <para>If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is +checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...) +it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even +recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet.</para> + </note> + + <para>The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature +allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box +<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second +box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure +somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards +corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot +below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be +warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports.</para> + + <para>These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the +Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary +packages are downloaded.</para> + + <tip> + <para>If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network & +Internet, icon Set up a new network interface.</para> + </tip> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakfont.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakfont.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6fd78f66 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakfont.xml @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakfont"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakfont-ti1">管理、新增及移除字型、匯入 Windows® 字型</title> + + <subtitle>drakfont</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakfont-im1" fileref="drakfont.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakfont</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the <emphasis role="bold">System</emphasis> tab. It +allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen +above shows:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>the installed font names, styles and sizes.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>a preview of the selected font.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>some buttons explained here later.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Get Windows Fonts: </emphasis></para> + + <para>This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You +must have Microsoft Windows installed.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Options:</emphasis></para> + + <para>It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly) able +to use the fonts.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Uninstall:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place. Be +careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the +documents that use them.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Import:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The +supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the +<emphasis role="bold">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis +role="bold">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the +fonts to install, click on <emphasis role="bold">Install</emphasis> when +done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts.</para> + + <para>If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont +main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakguard.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakguard.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..885706d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakguard.xml @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakguard"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakguard-ti1">家長控制</title> + + <subtitle>drakguard</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakguard.png" revision="1" xml:id="drakguard-im1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakguard</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found in the Mageia +Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental +Control</guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the +drakguard package (not installed by default).</para> + + <section> + <title>Presentation</title> + + <para>Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to +restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three +useful capabilities:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by +controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can +only execute what you accept them to execute.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through +blacklists/whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the +website. To achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental +control blocker DansGuardian.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Configuring Parental controls</title> + + <para><warning> + <para>If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2, +Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on +your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel +feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named +users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by +an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this +prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will +then suggest you reboot.</para> + </warning><guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental +control is enabled and the access to <guilabel>Block programs</guilabel> tab +is opened.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the +websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all +the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab.</para> + + <para><guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have +their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the +right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are +not inconvenienced. Select a user in the left hand side and click on +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user. Select an +user in the right hand side and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to +remove him/her from the allowed users.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Time control:</guibutton> If checked, internet access is allowed +with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and +<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time +window.</para> + + <section> + <title>Blacklist/Whitelist tab</title> + + <para>Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Block Programs Tab</title> + + <para><guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to +restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the +applications you wish to block.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand +side will not be subject to acl blocking.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakgw.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakgw.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..03129f5e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakgw.xml @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakgw" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakgw-ti1">分享網際網路連線</title> + + <subtitle>drakgw</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakgw.png" format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="drakgw-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-principles"> + <title>Principles</title> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../drakgw-net.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>This is useful when you have a +computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local +network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to +other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the +gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card +must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to +the Internet (2).</para> + + <para>The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are +set up, as documented in <xref linkend="draknetcenter"/>.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-wizard"> + <title>Gateway wizard</title> + + <para>The wizard<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakgw</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> offers successive steps +which are shown below:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this +and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard +automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that +what is proposed is correct.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes +one, check that this is correct.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask +and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual +configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard +will check that <code>bind</code> is installed. Otherwise, you have to +specify the address of a DNS server.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard +will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure +it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard +will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it, +with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the +proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to +printers and to share them.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para>You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-configure"> + <title>Configure the client</title> + + <para>If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to +specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address +automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting +to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is +using.</para> + + <para>If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular +specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the +gateway.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-stop"> + <title>Stop connection sharing</title> + + <para>If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch +the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the +sharing.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakhosts.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakhosts.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..29587b8e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakhosts.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakhosts" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakhosts-ti1">主機定義</title> + + <subtitle>drakhosts</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="drakhosts.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakhosts-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed +IP-addresses, this tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakhosts</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows to +specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name +instead of the IP-address.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Add</guibutton></para> + + <para>With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window +to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an +alias which can be used in the same way that the name is.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Modify</guibutton></para> + + <para>You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the +same window.</para> + + <para/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakinvictus.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakinvictus.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..479ff4d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakinvictus.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakinvictus" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakinvictus-ti1">網路界面與防火牆的進階設定</title><subtitle>drakinvictus</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakinvictus-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakinvictus.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakinvictus</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draknetcenter.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draknetcenter.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4c36e2d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draknetcenter.xml @@ -0,0 +1,220 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draknetcenter" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + + + + + <info> + <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-31 +Write some text means i can't do it :( +What must we say about networks out of wired (Ethernet) and wireless (WI fi) like GPRS, bluetooth ? I can't write anything. +--> +<!-- --> +<title xml:id="draknetcenter-ti1">網路中心</title> + + <subtitle>draknetcenter</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" fileref="draknetcenter.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="draknetcenter-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draknetcenter</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the Network +& Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Network Center"</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>前言</title> + + <para>When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks +configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite, +etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending +on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its +settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a +network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, +ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab.</para> + + <para>In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the +first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterEthernet-on.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject> (this one is not connected<inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterEthernet-off.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject> ) and the second section shows wireless +networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterWireless-off.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject> and this one <inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterWireless-on.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject>if connected. For the other network types, +the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not +connected.</para> + + <para>In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected +networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal +strengh</guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and +the <guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then +either on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> +or <guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network +to another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings +window (see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption +key in particular).</para> + + <para>Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The Monitor button</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the +PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is +available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray +-> Monitor Network</guimenu>.</para> + + <para>There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the +local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which +gives details about connection status.</para> + + <note> + <para>At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic +accounting</guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The Configure button</title> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">A - For a wired network</emphasis></para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>It is possible to change all the settings given during network +creation. Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton> +<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual +configuration may give better results.</para> + + <para>For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks +like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the +<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are +available from your providers website.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count +the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in +the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may +have to reconnect to the network.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow interface to be controlled by Network +Manager:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">B - For a wireless network</emphasis></para> + + <para>Only the items not already seen above are explained.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Operating mode:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access +point, there is an <emphasis role="bold">ESSID</emphasis> detected. Select +<guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select +<emphasis role="bold">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as the +access point, your network card needs to support this mode.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis></para> + + <para>If it is a private network, you need to know these settings.</para> + + <para><guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a +passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA +personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used +in private networks.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:</para> + + <para>Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access +point while remaining connected to the network.</para> + + <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The Advanced Settings button</title> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draknetprofile.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draknetprofile.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..17b5d8bc --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draknetprofile.xml @@ -0,0 +1,237 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + +<section xmlns='http://docbook.org/ns/docbook' + xmlns:ns5='http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML' + xmlns:ns4='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg' + xmlns:ns3='http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml' + xmlns:ns2='http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink' + xmlns:ns='http://docbook.org/ns/docbook' + xml:id='draknetprofile' version='5.0'> + + <info> + <title xml:id='draknetprofile-ti1'>管理不同的網路設定檔</title> + <subtitle>Draknetprofile</subtitle> + </info> + + <section> + <title>前言</title> + + <para>Each network interface of a Mageia system is initially configured with a fix +set of parameters. This corresponds to what is expected by a user of a +desktop computer, but may not be adequate when the system is moved between +various network environments: having the system run in different network +environments will require that multiple configurations co-exist for a given +network device - otherwise the interface might need to be re-configured each +time the network environment changes.</para> + + <section> + <title>自訂檔案</title> + + <para>Linux provides support for multiple configurations of network devices as a +standard feature. The notion of a <emphasis role='bold'>"network +profile"</emphasis> refers to a set of configurations of network devices, +defined for a specific network environment. Each network profile has a +<emphasis role='bold'>name</emphasis> - the initial configuration that comes +out of system generation has the name <emphasis>"default"</emphasis>; when a +new profile is created, a name must be specified which is different from all +already existing profile names.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Draknetprofile</title> + + <para>Draknetprofile is a - very simple - component of the Mageia Control Center +(MCC), it provides a Graphical User Interface (GUI) for managing +profiles. This GUI allows to + + <itemizedlist> + + <listitem> + <para>switch between profiles - i.e. activate a target profile to become the +"current profile",</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>create a new, additional profile,</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>delete a profile from the list of defined profiles.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Running Draknetprofile</title> + + <section> + <title>Defining profiles, profile switching</title> + + <para>Defining/modifying profiles concerns the entire Linux system and all its +users. Running draknetprofile therefore requires root privileges. Normally, +launching is achieved from within MCC (which already runs as root):</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id='draknetprofile-im1' + fileref='./draknetprofile_mcc.png' format='PNG' align='center' + revision='1'/> + </imageobject> + <caption> + <para><emphasis role='bold'>Figure 1: Mageia Control Center: Network & +Internet tab</emphasis></para> + </caption> + </mediaobject> + + <orderedlist> + + <listitem> + <para>launch the MCC by hitting the MCC icon in one of the panels of your desktop,</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>select the "Network & Internet" tab,</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>hit "Manage different network profiles" in the "Personalize and Secure your +network" Section (solid red contour in Figure 1).</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <para>Draknetprofile can also be launched by a command-line instruction from a +terminal emulator with root privileges (this may be helpful when +standard-output or error-output from draknetprofile needs to be consulted - +for instance for debugging). Simply type:</para> + + <informaltable frame='all' colsep='1' rowsep='1'> + <tgroup cols='1'> + <?dbhtml cellpadding='4' ?> + <tbody> + <row><?dbhtml bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?><?dbfo bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?> + <entry><literal> draknetprofile </literal></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + + <para>After the launch, the main page of Draknetprofile will be displayed:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id='draknetprofile-im2' + fileref='./draknetprofile_main.png' format='PNG' + align='center' revision='1'/> + </imageobject> + <caption> + <para><emphasis role='bold'>Figure 2: Management actions of +Draknetprofile</emphasis></para> + </caption> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The upper zone of the window contains the list of the names of all presently +defined profiles. The bottom zone presents a series of buttons:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + + <listitem> + <para>"Activate" ... establish the selected profile (top zone of the window) as +the current profile (and save the properties of the old profile);</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>"New" ... create a new profile;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>"Delete" ... delete the selected profile from the list of defined profiles;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>"Quit" ... exit from Draknetprofile.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>Before hitting the "Activate" or the "Delete" button, you have to select a +profile from the list: select it by a left-button click on the name of the +target profile.</para> + + <para>Hitting the "New" button will launch an auxiliary window where you can type +the name of the profile you want to create; this name must be different from +any already existing profile. This profile will be created as a precise copy +of the currently active profile and immediately activated as the current +profile. You will probably then need to specify its properties (modify the +automatically created configuration) in a second, independent action:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + + <listitem> + <para>exit from Draknetprofile (hit the "Quit" button),</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>back in the "Network & Internet" tab, you select the tab "Set up a new +network interface (...)" (marked with dashed red contour in Figure 1),</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>you then go through the steps for configuring the interface; they are +similar to those you did for configuring the original interface during +system generation - as documented in the <link +linkend='drakconnect-ti1'>Drakconnect manual</link>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>The middle zone of the window is normally hidden, hit the "Advanced" button +to make it visible. It should display the list of names of Draknetprofile +<emphasis role='bold'>"modules"</emphasis> (such as "network", "firewall", +"urpmi"), each with a check-button next to the name; these check-buttons +determine whether the properties controlled by that module are included into +the profile or not.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Using a system that has more than one profile</title> + + <para>In a system where several profiles are defined, an additional user +interaction is required when the system boots: at the very end of the +bootstrapping activities - just before the Desktop Environment starts - you +will get a message like</para> + + <informaltable frame='all' colsep='1' rowsep='1'> + <tgroup cols='1'> + <?dbhtml cellpadding='4' ?> + <tbody> + <row><?dbhtml bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?><?dbfo bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?> + <entry><literal> Select network profile: (1) default (2) +roaming* </literal></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + + <para>Type 1 or 2 to select the "default", respectively the "roaming" profile, or +carriage-return to select the profile that is marked with an asterisk (the +profile that was active when the system had been shut down).</para> + + <para>Presently (Mageia-5) there appears to be an intermittent problem: it happens +that the system becomes unresponsive after soliciting the user to select a +profile. The only way out of this situation is to launch another boot. This +problem is under investigation.</para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Appendix: Files relevant to Draknetprofile</title> + + <para>The configuration data of network interfaces are stored in the directory +<emphasis>/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/</emphasis>, in files with names +like <emphasis>ifcfg-xxx</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>The name of the currently active profile is maintained in the file +<emphasis>/etc/netprofile/current</emphasis> . + </para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draknfs.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draknfs.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..30bc203a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draknfs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,165 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="draknfs" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draknfs-ti1">使用 NFS 分享磁碟機與目錄</title> + + <subtitle>draknfs</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>Prerequisites</title> + + <para>When the wizard<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draknfs</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is launched for the +first time, it may display the following message:</para> + + <blockquote> + <para>The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?</para> + </blockquote> + + <para>After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Main window</title> + + <para>A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list +is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a +configuration tool.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>修改項目</title> + + <para>The configuration tool is labeled "Modify entry". It may be also launched +with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are +available.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs4.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>NFS Directory</title> + + <para>Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The +<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose +it.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>主機存取</title> + + <para>Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared +directory.</para> + + <para>NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:</para> + + <para><emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name +recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address</para> + + <para><emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group.</para> + + <para><emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard +characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the +domain cs.foo.edu.</para> + + <para><emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all +hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either +`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>使用者 ID 對應</title> + + <para><emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid +0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client +cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on +the server itself.</para> + + <para><emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root +squashing. This option is mainly useful for diskless clients +(no_root_squash).</para> + + <para><emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids +to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP +directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID +mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting.</para> + + <para><emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of +the anonymous account.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>進階選項</title> + + <para><emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests +originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024). This option +is on by default.</para> + + <para><emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read +and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any +request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by +using this option.</para> + + <para><emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from +violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made +by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive).</para> + + <para><emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can +help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See +exports(5) man page for more details.</para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Menu entries</title> + + <para>So far the list has at least one entry.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs5.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im5"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>File|Write conf</title> + + <para>Save the current configuration.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>NFS Server|Restart</title> + + <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>NFS Server|Reload</title> + + <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration +files.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakproxy.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakproxy.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1b0f2930 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakproxy.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakproxy" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakproxy-ti1">代理伺服器</title> + + <subtitle>drakproxy</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakproxy.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakproxy-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use +this tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakproxy</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> to configure it. Your net +administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify +some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception.</para> + + <para>From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a +proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts as +an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other +servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, +such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a +different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to +simplify and control their complexity.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakrpm-edit-media.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakrpm-edit-media.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1ee9cb80 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakrpm-edit-media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-ti1">Configure Media</title> + + <subtitle>drakrpm-edit-media</subtitle> + </info> + + + + + + <mediaobject> + <!-- 2013-01-06 marja - added Qilaq's and spturtle's corrections --> +<!--2013-10-22 marja - improved wording, thanks to Aragorn :-) + - adjusted "Add" part to changed behaviour of this tool + (no longer a choice to only add "update sources" is + given) --> +<imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-im1" fileref="drakrpm-edit-media.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><important> + <para>First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (also known as +repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the media sources +to be used to install and update packages and applications. (see Add button +below).</para> + </important> <note> + <para>If you install (or upgrade) Mageia using an optical media (DVD or CD) or a +USB device, there will be a software source configured to the optical media +used. To avoid being asked to insert the media when you install new +packages, you should disable (or delete) this media. (It will have the +media type CD-Rom).</para> + </note> <note> + <para>Your system is running under an architecture which may be 32-bit (called +i586), or 64-bit (called x86_64). Some packages are independent of whether +your system is 32-bit or 64-bit; these are called noarch packages. They +don't have their own noarch directories on the mirrors, but are all in both +the i586 and the x86_64 media.</para> + </note></para> + + <para>This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis +role="bold">Software management.</emphasis><footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote></para> + + <section> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-columns">The columns</title> + + <bridgehead>Column Enable:</bridgehead> + + <para>The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with +some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable.</para> + + <bridgehead>Column Update:</bridgehead> + + <para>The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be enabled. Only +media with "Update" in its name should be selected. For security reasons, +this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open a console as root +and type <emphasis role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media --expert.</emphasis></para> + + <bridgehead>Column medium:</bridgehead> + + <para>Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final release +versions contain at least:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs available +supported by Mageia.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs which +are not free</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there might +be patent claims in some countries.</para> + + <para>Each medium has 4 sub-sections:</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the this +version of Mageia was released.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since release +due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium enabled, +even with a very slow internet connection.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions +backported from Cauldron (the next version under development).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests +of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the +corrections.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-right-button">The buttons on the right</title> + + <para><guibutton>Remove:</guibutton></para> + + <para>To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise to +remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example) since +all the packages it contains are in the official Core release medium.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Edit:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader and +proxy).</para> + + <para><guibutton>Add:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Add the official repositories available on the Internet. These repositories +contain only safe and well tested software. Clicking on the "Add" button +adds the mirrorlist to your configuration, it is designed to make sure that +you install and update from a mirror close to you. If you prefer to choose a +specific mirror, then add it by choosing "Add a specific media mirror" from +the drop-down "File" menu.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Up and down arrows:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads the list +in the displayed order and will install the first package found for the same +release number - in the event of a version mismatch, the latest release will +be installed. So if possible, put the fastest repositories at the top.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-menu">The menu</title> + + <para><guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu></para> + + <para>A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to update and +click on the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button.</para> + + <para><guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu></para> + + <para>Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's +too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the +actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them +out. Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose +between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the +<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by +clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakrpmEditMedia2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very +close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available +mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu></para> + + <para>It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for example) that +isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears:</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>Select the medium type, find a smart +name that well define the medium and give the URL (or the path, according to +the medium type)</para> + + <para><guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu></para> + + <para>This item allows you to choose when to "Verify RPMs to be installed" (always +or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to define the +download policy for information about the packages (on demand -by default-, +update only, always or never).</para> + + <para><guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu></para> + + <para>To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to authenticate +the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or disallow a key. In the +window that appear, select a medium and then click on +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to allow a new key or to select a key and click +on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to disallow that key.</para> + + <para><warning> + <para>Do this with care, as with all security-related questions</para> + </warning><guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu></para> + + <para>If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can configure it +here. You only need to give the <guibutton>Proxy hostname</guibutton> and if +necessary a <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel>.</para> + + <para/> + + <para>For more information about configuring the media, see <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Software_management">the Mageia Wiki +page</link>.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draksambashare.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draksambashare.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..605f0e33 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draksambashare.xml @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draksambashare" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksambashare-ti1">Share directories and drives with Samba</title> + + <subtitle>draksambashare</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare.png" format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="draksambashare-im1" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>前言</title> + + <para>Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some +resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure +the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is +also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the +resources of the Samba server.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Preparation</title> + + <para>To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP +address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with +<xref linkend="draknetcenter"/>, or at the DHCP server which identifies the +station with its MAC-address and give it always the same address. The +firewall has also to allow the incoming requests to the Samba server.</para> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Wizard - Standalone server</title> + + <para>At the first run, the tools <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing<emphasis +role="bold"> draksambashare</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> checks if +needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are not +yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare0.png" xml:id="draksambashare0-im1" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already +selected.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare1.png" align="center" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare1-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the +access to the shared resources.</para> + + <para>The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on +the network.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare2.png" align="center" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare2-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose the security mode:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the +resource</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for +each share</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP +address or host name.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare3.png" format="PNG" align="center" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare3-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be +described in the Windows workstations.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="draksambashare-im4" align="center" fileref="draksambashare4.png" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="draksambashare-im5" align="center" fileref="draksambashare5.png" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the +configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in +<code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare6.png" xml:id="draksambashare-im6" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Wizard - Primary domain controller</title> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare13.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>If the "Primary domain controller" +option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is to support or +not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are then the same +as for standalone server, except you can choose also the security mode:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and +group accounts in a central, shared, account repository. The centralized +account repository is shared between (security) controllers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Declare a directory to share</title> + + <para>With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="draksambashare-im7" fileref="draksambashare15.png" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the +<guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether +the directory is visible to the public, writable or browseable. The share +name can not be modified.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare16.png" xml:id="draksambashare-im8" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Menu entries</title> + + <para>When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used.</para> + + <formalpara> + <title>File|Write conf</title> + + <para>Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Samba server|Configure</title> + + <para>The wizard can be run again with this command.</para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Samba server|Restart</title> + + <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Samba Server|Reload</title> + + <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration +files.</para> + </formalpara> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Printers share</title> + + <para>Samba also allows you to share printers.</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare17.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Samba users</title> + + <para>In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared +resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref +linkend="userdrake"/><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare18.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draksec.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draksec.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cc49cd47 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draksec.xml @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="draksec"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksec-ti1">設定 Mageia 工具的認證</title> + + <subtitle>draksec</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="draksec-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="draksec0.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draksec</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote>is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Security</emphasis></para> + + <para>It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks +usually done by the administrator.</para> + + <para>Click on the little arrow before the item you want to drop down: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksec.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in +the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a +drop down list on the right side gives the choice between:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Default: The launch mode depends on the chosen security level. See in the +same MCC tab, the tool "Configure system security, permissions and audit".</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Administrator password: The root password is asked before the tool launching</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>No password: The tool is launched without asking any password.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draksnapshot-config.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draksnapshot-config.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c7af61f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draksnapshot-config.xml @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xml:id="draksnapshot-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksnapshot-config-ti1">快照</title> + <subtitle>draksnapshot-config</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="draksnapshot-config-im1" revision="1" align="center" + format="PNG" fileref="draksnapshot-config.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draksnapshot-config </emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is available in MCC's +<guilabel>System</guilabel> tab, in the <guilabel>Administration +tools</guilabel> section.</para> + <para>When you start this tool in MCC for the first time, you will see a message +about installing draksnapshot. Click on <guibutton>Install</guibutton> to +proceed. Draksnapshot and some other packages it needs will be installed.</para> + + <para>Click again on <guilabel>Snapshots</guilabel>, you will see the +<guilabel>Settings</guilabel> screen. Tick <guilabel>Enable +Backups</guilabel> and, if you want to backup the whole system, +<guilabel>Backup the whole system</guilabel>.</para> + <para>If you only want to backup part of your directories, then choose +<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>. You will see a little pop-up screen. Use the +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> and <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> buttons next to +the <guilabel>Backup list</guilabel> to include or exclude directories and +files from the backup. Use the same buttons next to the +<guilabel>Exclude</guilabel> list to remove subdirectories and/or files from +the chosen directories, that should <emphasis role="bold">not</emphasis> be +included in the backup. Click on <guibutton>Close</guibutton> when you are +done.</para> + <para>Now give the path to <guilabel>Where to backup</guilabel>, or choose the +<guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select the correct path. Any mounted +USB-key or external HD can be found in <emphasis +role="bold">/run/media/your_user_name/</emphasis>. + </para> + <para>Click on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> to make the snapshot.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draksound.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draksound.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f128f9a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/draksound.xml @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xml:id="draksound" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksound-ti1">聲音設定</title> + <subtitle>draksound</subtitle> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="draksound-im1" fileref="draksound.png" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draksound</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.</para> + <para>Draksound deals with the sound configuration, PulseAudio options and +troubleshooting. It will help you if you experience sound problems or if you +change the sound card.</para> + <para><guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound +inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting +sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio +volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences.</para> + <para>PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it +enabled.</para> + <para><guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It +is also recommended to leave it enabled.</para> + <para>The <guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> button gives assistance with +fixing any problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this +before asking the community for help.</para> + <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button displays a new window with an +obvious button.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksound1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakups.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakups.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fc6491ea --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakups.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakups" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakups-ti1">建立監控電源的 UPS</title><subtitle>drakups</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakups-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakups.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakups</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakvpn.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakvpn.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7269b815 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakvpn.xml @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakvpn"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakvpn-ti1">Configure VPN Connection to secure network access</title> + + <subtitle>drakvpn</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakvpn-im1" align="center" fileref="drakvpn1.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>前言</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakvpn</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows to configure secure +access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local +workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the +configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is +already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the +network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file .</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>組態設定</title> + + <para>First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which +protocol is used for your virtual private network.</para> + + <para>Then give your connection a name.</para> + + <para>At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>For Cisco VPN</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakvpn3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the +first time the tool is used.</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakvpn7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>Select the files that you received +from the network administrator.</para> + + <para>Advanced parameters:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakvpn8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN +connection.</para> + + <para>This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network +connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect +to this VPN.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_apache2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_apache2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..41433f95 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_apache2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_apache2" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-ti1">Configure webserver</title><subtitle>drakwizard apache2</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_apache2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up a web +server. + </para> + <section> + <title>What is a web server?</title> + <para> + Web server is the software that helps to deliver web content that can be +accessed through the Internet. (From Wikipedia) + </para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Setting up a web server with drakwizard apache2</title> + <para> + Welcome to the web server wizard. + </para> + <procedure> + <step> + <title>前言</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Exposing the web server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad +things. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server User Module</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Allows users to create their own sites. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>User web directory name</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + The user needs to create and populate this directory, then the server will +display it. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server Document Root</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Allows you to configure the path to the web servers default documents. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>摘要</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>完成</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im8" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_bind.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_bind.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fda72f8c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_bind.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_bind" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_bind-ti1">設定 DNS</title><subtitle>drakwizard bind</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_bind-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_bind.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard bind</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_dhcp.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_dhcp.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ee467fd5 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_dhcp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-ti1">設定 DHCP</title> + + <subtitle>drakwizard dhcp</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im1" fileref="drakwizard_dhcp.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><note> + <para>This tool is broken in Mageia 4 because of new naming scheme for the Net +interfaces</para> + </note></para> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> can help you to set up a +<acronym>DHCP</acronym> server. It is a component of drakwizard which should +be installed before you can access to it.</para> + + <section> + <title>What is DHCP?</title> + + <para>The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (<acronym>DHCP</acronym>) is a +standardized networking protocol used on IP networks that dynamically +configures IP addresses and other information that is needed for Internet +communication. (From Wikipedia)</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Setting up a DHCP server with drakwizard dhcp</title> + + <para>Welcome to the DHCP server wizard.</para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <title>前言</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Selecting Adaptor</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose the network interface, which is connected to the subnet, and for +which DHCP will assign IP addresses, and then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Select IP range</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step3.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Select the beginning and ending IP addresses of the range of IPs you want +the server to offer, along with the IP of the gateway machine connecting to +some place outside the local network, hopefully close to the Internet, then +click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>摘要</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step4.png" revision="1" align="center" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im5" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Hold on...</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step5.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im6"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This can be fixed. Click <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> a few times and +change things around.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Hours later...</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step6.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im7"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section> + <title>What is done</title> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Installing the package dhcp-server if needed;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Saving <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf</code> in <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf.orig;</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Creating a new <code>dhcpd.conf</code> starting from +<code>/usr/share/wizards/dhcp_wizard/scripts/dhcpd.conf.default</code> and +adding the new parameters:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><code>hname</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>dns</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>net</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>ip</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>mask</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>rng1</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>rng2</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>dname</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>gateway</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>tftpserverip</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>dhcpd_interface</code></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Also modifying Webmin configuration file +<code>/etc/webmin/dhcpd/config</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Restarting <code>dhcpd.</code></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_ntp.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_ntp.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18161c4b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_ntp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakwizard_ntp" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-ti1">設定時間</title> + + <subtitle>drakwizard ntp</subtitle> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject> + <!-- 2013-10-25 Lebarhon - 3 screenshots ready to be added when it is possible --> +<imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard_ntp.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> purpose is to set the time of +your server synchronised with an external server. It isn't installed by +default and you have to also install the drakwizard and drakwizard-base +packages.</para> + + <section> + <title>Setup a NTP server with drakwizard ntp</title> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para>After a welcome screen (see above), the second one ask you to choose three +time servers in the drop down lists and suggests to use pool.ntp.org twice +because this server always points to available time servers.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp2.png"> + <info> +<author> <personname/> </author> <pubdate/></info> + </imagedata> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para>The following screens allows to choose the region and the city and then, you +arrive on a summary. If something is wrong, you can obviously change it +using the <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>button. If everything is right, +click on the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button to proceed to the test. It +may take a while and you finally get this screen below:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para>Click on the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button to close the tool</para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>What is done</title> + + <para>This tool executes the following steps:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Installing the package <code>ntp</code> if needed</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Saving the files <code>/etc/sysconfig/clock</code> to +<code>/etc/sysconfig/clock.orig</code> and +<code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> to +<code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers.orig</code>;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Writing a new file <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> with the list of +servers;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Modifying the file <code>/etc/ntp.conf</code> by inserting the first server +name;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Stopping and starting <code>crond</code>, <code>atd</code> and +<code>ntpd</code> services;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Setting the hardware clock to the current system time with UTC reference.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_proftpd.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_proftpd.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..603f899c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_proftpd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-ti1">設定 FTP</title><subtitle>drakwizard proftpd</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_proftpd.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up an +<acronym>FTP</acronym> server. + </para> + <section> + <title>What is <acronym>FTP</acronym>?</title> + <para> + File Transfer Protocol (<acronym>FTP</acronym>) is a standard network +protocol used to transfer files from one host to another host over a +<acronym>TCP</acronym>-based network, such as the Internet. (From Wikipedia) + </para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Setting up an FTP server with drakwizard proftpd</title> + <para> + Welcome to the FTP wizard. Buckle up. + </para> + <procedure> + <step> + <title>前言</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Exposing the FTP server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad +things. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server Information</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Enter name the sever will use to introduce itself, someone to email +complaints too and whether to allow root login access. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Set listening port, jailed user, allow resumes and/or <acronym>FXP</acronym> +(File eXchange Protocol) + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>摘要</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>完成</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_squid.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_squid.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1478915d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_squid.xml @@ -0,0 +1,238 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="drakwizard_squid" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_squid-ti1">設定 proxy</title> + + <subtitle>drakwizard squid</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard_squid.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard squid</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> can help you to set up a +proxy server. It is a component of drakwizard which should be installed +before you can access to it.</para> + + <section> + <title>What is a proxy server?</title> + + <para>A proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts +as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other +servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, +such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a +different server and the proxy server evaluates the request as a way to +simplify and control its complexity. (From Wikipedia)</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Setting up a proxy server with drakwizard squid</title> + + <para>Welcome to the proxy server wizard.</para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <title>前言</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step1.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im2"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Selecting the proxy port</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step2.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im3"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Select the proxy port browsers will connect through, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Set Memory and Disk Usage</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step3.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Set memory and disk cache limits, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Select Network Access Control</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step4.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im5"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Set visibility to local network or world, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Grant Network Access</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step5.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im6"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Grant access to local networks, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Use Upper Level Proxy Server?</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step6.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im7"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Cascade through another proxy server? If no, skip next step.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Upper Level Proxy URL and Port</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step7.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im8"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Provide upper level proxy hostname and port, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>摘要</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step8.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im9"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Start during boot?</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step9.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im10"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose if the proxy server should be started during the boot time, then +click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>完成</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step10.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im11"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section> + <title>What is done</title> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Installing the package squid if needed;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Saving <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf</code> in +<code>/etc/squid/squid.conf.orig;</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Creating a new <code>squid.conf</code> starting from +<code>squid.conf.default</code> and adding the new parameters:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><code>cache_dir</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>localnet</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>cache_mem</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>http_port</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>level</code> 1, 2 or 3 and <code>http_access</code> according to level</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>cache_peer</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>visible_hostname</code></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Restarting <code>squid.</code></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_sshd.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_sshd.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ae33f6bf --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakwizard_sshd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_sshd" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-ti1">OpenSSH 組態設定</title><subtitle>drakwizard sshd</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_sshd.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up an +<acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon. + </para> + <section> + <title>What is <acronym>SSH</acronym>?</title> + <para> + Secure Shell (SSH) is a cryptographic network protocol for secure data +communication, remote command-line login, remote command execution, and +other secure network services between two networked computers that connects, +via a secure channel over an insecure network, a server and a client +(running SSH server and <acronym>SSH</acronym> client programs, +respectively). (From Wikipedia) + </para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Setting up an <acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon with drakwizard sshd</title> + <para> + Welcome to the Open SSH wizard. + </para> + <procedure> + <step> + <title>Select Type of Configure Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Choose <guilabel>Expert</guilabel> for all options or +<guilabel>Newbie</guilabel> to skip steps 3-7, click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>一般選項</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Sets visibility and root access options. Port 22 is the standard +<acronym>SSH</acronym> port. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Authentication Methods</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Allow a variety of authentication methods users can use while connecting, +then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Logging</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Choose logging facility and level of output, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Login Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Configure per-login settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>User Login Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Configure the user access settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Compression and Forwarding</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im8" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Configure X11 forwarding and compression during transfer, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>摘要</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im9" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>完成</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im10" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step9.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakxservices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakxservices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..725abbc0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/drakxservices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakxservices" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakxservices-ti1">啟動或停用系統服務</title><subtitle>drakxservices</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata width="80%" xml:id="drakxservices-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakxservices.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakxservices</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/harddrake2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/harddrake2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cf824e23 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/harddrake2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="harddrake2" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="harddrake2-ti1">Hardware configuration</title> + + <subtitle>harddrake2</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="harddrake2.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="harddrake2-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">harddrake2</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> gives a general view of the +hardware of your computer. When the tool is launched, it executes a job to +look for every element of the hardware. For that, it uses the command +<code>ldetect </code>which refers to a list of hardware in +<code>ldetect-lst</code> package.</para> + + <section> + <title>The window</title> + + <para>The window is divided in two columns.</para> + + <para>The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The devices are +grouped by categories. Click on the > to expand the content of a +category. Each device can be selected in this column.</para> + + <para>The right column displays information about the selected device. The +<guimenu>Help -> Fields description</guimenu> gives some information +about the content of the fields.</para> + + <para>According to which type of device is selected, either one or two buttons are +available at the bottom of the right column:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guibutton>Set current driver options</guibutton>: this can be used to +parameterize the module which is used in relation to the device. This must +used by experts only.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guibutton>Run config tool</guibutton>: access to the tool which can +configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from the MCC.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The menu</title> + + <para><bridgehead>選項</bridgehead></para> + + <para>The <guimenu>options</guimenu> menu gives the opportunity to check boxes to +enable automatic detection:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>modem</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Jaz devices</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Zip parallel devices</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist>By default these detections are not enabled, because they are slow. Check +the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware connected. Detection will +be operational the next time this tool is started.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/keyboarddrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/keyboarddrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4fc966b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/keyboarddrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="keyboarddrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="keyboarddrake-ti1">Set up the Keyboard Layout</title> + + + + <!-- 2012-09-02 marja changed the title to "Set up the Keyboard Layout", so it is the same as the title in MCC --> +<subtitle>keyboarddrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="keyboarddrake.png" xml:id="keyboarddrake-im1" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>前言</title> + + <para>The keyboarddrake tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">keyboarddrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> helps you +configure the basic layout for the keyboard that you wish to use on +Mageia. It affects the keyboard layout for all users on the system. It can +be found in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled +"Configure mouse and keyboard".</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Keyboard Layout</title> + + <para>Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed +in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each +layout should be used for.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Keyboard Type</title> + + <para>This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are +unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/localedrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/localedrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e4f45450 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/localedrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="localedrake" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="localedrake-ti1">管理您的系統之區域及語言</title> + + <subtitle>localedrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="localedrake.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="localedrake-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">localedrake</emphasis> as root. + </para></footnote> can be found in the System +section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled "Manage localization for +your system". It opens with a window in which you can choose your +language. The choice is adapted to languages selected during installation.</para> + + <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button give access to activate +compatibility with old encoding (non UTF8).</para> + + <para>The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected +language. The button <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> gives access to +countries not listed.</para> + + <para>You have to restart your session after any modifications.</para> + +<section xml:id="input_method"> + <info> + <title xml:id="input_method-ti1">Input method</title> + </info> + <para>In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an +input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input +methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, +Korean, etc).</para> + <para> For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method so +users should not need to configure it manually.</para> + <para>Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar functions +and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed in another +part of the Mageia Control Center. See <xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref>.</para> +</section> + +</section> + diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/logdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/logdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a70e4d83 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/logdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="logdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="logdrake-ti1">檢視與搜尋系統日誌</title> + + <subtitle>logdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="logdrake-im1" format="PNG" fileref="logdrake.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">logdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found in the Mageia +Control Center System tab, labelled "<guilabel>View and search system +logs</guilabel>".</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>To do a search in the logs</title> + + <para>First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis +role="bold">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to +<emphasis>do not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field +<emphasis role="bold">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s) +to search in the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is +possible to limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis +role="bold">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of the +month and year, and check "<guibutton>Show only for the selected +day</guibutton>". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> button +to see the results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the +file</guilabel>. It is possible to save the results in the .txt format by +clicking on the <emphasis role="bold">Save</emphasis> button.</para> + + <note> + <para>The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia +configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools. These logs are +updated each time a configuration is modified.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section> + <title>To configure a mail alert</title> + + <para><guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and +the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured +address.</para> + + <para>To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role="bold">Mail +Alert</emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton> +Configure the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the +running services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to +look watch. (See screenshot above).</para> + + <para>The following services can be watched :</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Webmin 服務</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Postfix 郵件伺服器</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>FTP 伺服器</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Apache WWW 伺服器</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>SSH 伺服主機</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Samba 伺服器</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Xinetd 服務</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>BIND Domain Name Resolve</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="logdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider +unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows +the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone +out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value +to 3 times the number of processors.</para> + + <para>In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the +person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local +or on the Internet).</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/lsnetdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/lsnetdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..191f2cc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/lsnetdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section +xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" +xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" +xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" +xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xml:id="lsnetdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="lsnetdrake-ti1">Display Available NFS And SMB Shares</title> + <subtitle>lsnetdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">lsnetdrake</emphasis>. + </para> + </footnote> can only be started and used +on the command line.</para> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Documentation +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/lspcidrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/lspcidrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..13845b69 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/lspcidrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="lspcidrake"> + <info> + <title xml:id="lspcidrake-ti1">Display Your PCI, USB and PCMCIA Information</title> + + <subtitle>lspcidrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">lspcidrake</emphasis>.</para> + </footnote> can only be started and used +on the command line. It will give some more information if used under root.</para> + + <para>lspcidrake gives the list of all the connected devices to the computer (USB, +PCI and PCMCIA) and the used drivers. It needs the ldetect and ldetect-lst +packages to work.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="lspcidrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>With the -v option, lspcidrake adds the vendor and device identifications.</para> + + <para>lspcidrake often generates very long lists, so, to find an information, it +is often used in a pipeline with the grep command, like in these examples:</para> + + <para>Information about the graphic card;</para> + + <para><command>lspcidrake | grep VGA</command></para> + + <para>Information about the network</para> + + <para><command>lspcidrake | grep -i network</command></para> + + <para>-i to ignore case distinctions.</para> + + <para>In this screenshot below, you can see the action of the -v option for +lspcidrake and the -i option for grep.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="lspcidrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>There is another tool that gives information about the hardware, it is +called <emphasis role="bold">dmidecode</emphasis> (under root)</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-boot.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-boot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..635e7229 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-boot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="mcc-boot"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-boot-ti1">開機</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-boot.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="mcc-boot-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot +steps. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + + <orderedlist><title>設定開機過程</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakautologin"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakboot"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakedm"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakautologin.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakboot.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakedm.xml"></xi:include> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-hardware.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-hardware.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3d7a90ab --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-hardware.xml @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="mcc-hardware"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-hardware-ti1">硬體</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-hardware.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-hardware-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your +hardware. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>管理您的硬體</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="harddrake2"/><emphasis> = Browse and configure +hardware</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draksound"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>設定顯示</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drak3d"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop effects</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="XFdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>設定滑鼠與鍵盤</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="keyboarddrake"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="mousedrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>設定印表機與掃描器</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="system-config-printer"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s), +the print job queues, ...</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="scannerdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>其他</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakups"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="harddrake2.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draksound.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drak3d.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="XFdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="keyboarddrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="mousedrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="system-config-printer.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="scannerdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakups.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-intro.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-intro.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d6dd9c47 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-intro.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="mcc-intro"><info><title xml:id="mcc-intro-ti1">About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center</title></info> + + + <para>The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options or tabs to +choose from in the left column, and even ten if the drakwizard package was +installed. Each of these tabs gives a different set of tools that can be +selected in the big right panel.</para> + + <para>The ten following chapters are about those ten options and the related +tools.</para> + +<para>The last chapter is about some other Mageia tools, that cannot be chosen in +any of the MCC tabs.</para> + + <para>The titles of the pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool +screens.</para> + + <para>There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on +the "Search" tab in the left column.</para> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-localdisks.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-localdisks.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a92d5f89 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-localdisks.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-localdisks" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-localdisks-ti1">本地端磁碟</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="mcc-localdisks-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-localdisks.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your +local disks. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>本地端磁碟</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="drakdisk"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--removable"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--fileshare"></xref></para></listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakdisk.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--removable.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--fileshare.xml"></xi:include> + + + </section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-network.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-network.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8756ccdf --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-network.xml @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-network" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-network-ti1">Network and Internet</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-network.png" xml:id="mcc-network-im1" /> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link +below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>管理您的網路裝置</title> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draknetcenter"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakconnect"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakconnect--del"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>自訂並保全您的網路</title> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakproxy"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakgw"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draknetprofile"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakvpn"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>其他</title> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="draknetcenter.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakconnect.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakconnect--del.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakproxy.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakgw.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="draknetprofile.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakvpn.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakhosts.xml"/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-networkservices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-networkservices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63b8b8d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-networkservices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="mcc-networkservices"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-networkservices-ti1">網路服務</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-networkservices.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-networkservices-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if +the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose +between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or +on <xref linkend="mcc-sharing"/>to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>網路服務</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_dhcp"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_bind"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_squid"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_ntp"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_sshd"/></para> + </listitem> + + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_dhcp.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_bind.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_squid.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_ntp.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_sshd.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-networksharing.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-networksharing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f68e5698 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-networksharing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-networksharing" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-networksharing-ti1">網路分享</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="mcc-networksharing-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-networksharing.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and +directories. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <orderedlist><title>設定 Windows(R) 分享</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--smb"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="draksambashare"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and +directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis></para></listitem> + </orderedlist></listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist><title>設定 NFS 分享</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--nfs"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="draknfs"></xref></para></listitem> + </orderedlist></listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist><title>設定 WebDAV 分享</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--dav"></xref></para></listitem> + </orderedlist></listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--smb.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draksambashare.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--nfs.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draknfs.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--dav.xml"></xi:include> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-security.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-security.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e83a9414 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-security.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="mcc-security"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-security-ti1">保全</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-security.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-security-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a +link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>保全</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="msecgui"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, permissions +and audit</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakfirewall"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draksec"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakinvictus"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakguard"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="msecgui.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakfirewall.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="draksec.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakinvictus.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="drakguard.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-sharing.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-sharing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..613db4ed --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-sharing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="mcc-sharing"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-sharing-ti1">共享</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-sharing.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-sharing-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only +visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can +choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link +below or on <xref linkend="mcc-networkservices"/>to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>共享</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_proftpd"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_apache2"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_proftpd.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_apache2.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-system.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-system.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd79f62c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mcc-system.xml @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xml:id="mcc-system" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-system-ti1">系統</title> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="mcc-system-im1" fileref="mcc-system.png" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>In this screen you can choose between several system and administration +tools. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>管理系統服務</title> + <listitem> + <para> <xref linkend="drakauth"/> </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakxservices"/></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakfont"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>地區化</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakclock"/></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="localedrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>管理工具</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="logdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakconsole"/></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="userdrake"/><emphasis> = Manage users on system</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="transfugdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakauth.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakxservices.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakfont.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakclock.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="localedrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="logdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakconsole.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="userdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="transfugdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="draksnapshot-config.xml"/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mgaapplet-config.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mgaapplet-config.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..623e6f46 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mgaapplet-config.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mgaapplet-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mgaapplet-config-ti1">設定更新頻率</title> + + <subtitle>mgaapplet-config</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="mgaapplet-config-im1" format="PNG" fileref="mgaapplet-config.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Software +management</emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click / +Updates configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject> in the system tray.</para> + + <para/> + + <para>The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for +updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check. The +check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is +out.</para> + + <para/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mousedrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mousedrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2349b298 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/mousedrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mousedrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mousedrake-ti1">設定游標裝置 (滑鼠、觸控板)</title> + + <subtitle>mousedrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="mousedrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="mousedrake.png" align="center" format="PNG" /> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">mousedrake</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by +Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse.</para> + + <para>The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse +and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time "Universal / Any +PS/2 & USB mice" is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is +immediately taken into account.</para> + + </section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/msecgui.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/msecgui.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d634a001 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/msecgui.xml @@ -0,0 +1,358 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="msecgui" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <info> + <title xml:id="msecgui-ti1">MSEC：系統安全與稽核</title> + + <subtitle>msecgui</subtitle> + </info> + + + + + <mediaobject> + <!-- written by Lebarhon 2014/01/03 To be checked--> +<imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="msecgui-im1" fileref="msecgui.png" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <section> + <title>Presentation</title> + + <para>msecgui<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">msecgui</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is a graphic user interface for +msec that allows to configure your system security according to two +approaches:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>It sets the system behaviour, msec imposes modifications to the system to +make it more secure.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>It carries on periodic checks automatically on the system in order to warn +you if something seems dangerous.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>msec uses the concept of "security levels" which are intended to configure a +set of system permissions, which can be audited for changes or +enforcement. Several of them are proposed by Mageia, but you can define your +own customised security levels.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Overview tab</title> + + <para>See the screenshot above</para> + + <para>The first tab takes up the list of the different security tools with a +button on the right side to configure them:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Firewall, also found in the MCC / Security / Set up your personal firewall</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Updates, also found in MCC / Software Management / Update your system</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>msec itself with some information:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>enabled or not</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the configured Base security level</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the date of the last Periodic checks and a button to see a detailed report +and another button to execute the checks just now.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Security settings tab</title> + + <para>A click on the second tab or on the Security +<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button leads to the same screen shown +below.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <section> + <title>Basic security tab</title> + + <para role="underline"> + <emphasis role="underline">Security levels:</emphasis> + </para> + + <para>After having checked the box <guilabel>Enable MSEC tool</guilabel>, this tab +allows you by a double click to choose the security level that appears then +in bold. If the box is not checked, the level « none » is applied. The +following levels are available:</para> + + <orderedlist numeration="arabic"> + <listitem> + <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">none</emphasis>. This level is intended if you +do not want to use msec to control system security, and prefer tuning it on +your own. It disables all security checks and puts no restrictions or +constraints on system configuration and settings. Please use this level only +if you are knowing what you are doing, as it would leave your system +vulnerable to attack.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">standard</emphasis>. This is the default +configuration when installed and is intended for casual users. It +constrains several system settings and executes daily security checks which +detect changes in system files, system accounts, and vulnerable directory +permissions. (This level is similar to levels 2 and 3 from past msec +versions).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">secure</emphasis>. This level is intended when +you want to ensure your system is secure, yet usable. It further restricts +system permissions and executes more periodic checks. Moreover, access to +the system is more restricted. (This level is similar to levels 4 (High) and +5 (Paranoid) from old msec versions).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Besides those levels, different task-oriented security are also provided, +such as the <emphasis role="bold">fileserver </emphasis>, <emphasis +role="bold">webserver</emphasis> and <emphasis +role="bold">netbook</emphasis> levels. Such levels attempt to pre-configure +system security according to the most common use cases.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The last two levels called <emphasis role="bold">audit_daily </emphasis> and +<emphasis role="bold">audit_weekly</emphasis> are not really security levels +but rather tools for periodic checks only.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <para>These levels are saved in +<filename>/etc/security/msec/level.<levelname></filename>. You can define +your own customised security levels, saving them into specific files called +<filename>level.<levelname></filename>, placed into the folder +<filename>/etc/security/msec/.</filename> This function is intended for +power users which require a customised or more secure system configuration.</para> + + <caution> + <para>Keep in mind that user-modified parameters take precedence over default +level settings.</para> + </caution> + + <para> + <emphasis role="underline">Security alerts:</emphasis> + </para> + + <para>If you check the box <guibutton>Send security alerts by email +to:</guibutton>, the security alerts generated by msec are going to be sent +by local e-mail to the security administrator named in the nearby field. You +can fill either a local user or a complete e-mail address (the local e-mail +and the e-mail manager must be set accordingly). At last, you can receive +the security alerts directly on your desktop. Check the relevant box to +enable it.</para> + + <important> + <para>It is strongly advisable to enable the security alerts option in order to +immediately inform the security administrator of possible security +problems. If not, the administrator will have to regularly check the logs +files available in <filename>/var/log/security.</filename></para></important> + + <para><emphasis role="underline">Security options:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Creating a customised level is not the only way to customise the computer +security, it is also possible to use the tabs presented here after to change +any option you want. Current configuration for msec is stored in +<filename>/etc/security/msec/security.conf</filename>. This file contains +the current security level name and the list of all the modifications done +to the options.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>System security tab</title> + + <para>This tab displays all the security options on the left side column, a +description in the centre column, and their current values on the right side +column.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>To modify an option, double click on it and a new window appears (see +screenshot below). It displays the option name, a short description, the +actual and default values, and a drop down list where the new value can be +selected. Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the +choice.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui11.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <caution> + <para>Do not forget when leaving msecgui to save definitively your configuration +using the menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you +have changed the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before +saving them.</para> + </caution> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui10.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>網路安全性</title> + + <para>This tab displays all the network options and works like the previous tab</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Periodic checks tab</title> + + <para>Periodic checks aim to inform the security administrator by means of +security alerts of all situations msec thinks potentially dangerous.</para> + + <para>This tab displays all the periodic checks done by msec and their frequency +if the box <guibutton>Enable periodic security checks</guibutton> is +checked. Changes are done like in the previous tabs.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Exceptions tab</title> + + <para>Sometimes alert messages are due to well known and wanted situations. In +these cases they are useless and wasted time for the administrator. This tab +allows you to create as many exceptions as you want to avoid unwanted alert +messages. It is obviously empty at the first msec start. The screenshot +below shows four exceptions.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>To create an exception, click on the <guibutton>Add a rule</guibutton> +button</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Select the wanted periodic check in the drop down list called +<guilabel>Check</guilabel> and then, enter the +<guilabel>Exception</guilabel> in the text area. Adding an exception is +obviously not definitive, you can either delete it using the +<guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button of the <guilabel>Exceptions</guilabel> +tab or modify it with a double clicK.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>權限</title> + <para>This tab is intended for file and directory permissions checking and +enforcement.</para> + <para>Like for the security, msec owns different permissions levels (standard, +secure, ..), they are enabled accordingly with the chosen security +level. You can create your own customised permissions levels, saving them +into specific files called <filename>perm.<levelname> </filename> placed +into the folder <filename>/etc/security/msec/</filename> . This function is +intended for power users which require a customised configuration. It is +also possible to use the tab presented here after to change any permission +you want. Current configuration is stored in +<filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf.</filename> This file contains the +list of all the modifications done to the permissions.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>Default permissions are visible as a list of rules (a rule per line). You +can see on the left side, the file or folder concerned by the rule, then the +owner, then the group and then the permissions given by the rule. If, for a +given rule:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is not checked, msec only checks if the +defined permissions for this rule are respected and sends an alert message +if not, but does not change anything.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is checked, then msec will rule the +permissions respect at the first periodic check and overwrite the +permissions.</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <important><para>For this to work, the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis +role="bold">Periodic check tab</emphasis> must be configured accordingly.</para></important><para>To create a new rule, click on the <guibutton> Add a rule</guibutton> button +and fill the fields as shown in the example below. The joker * is allowed in +the <guilabel>File</guilabel> field. “current” means no modification.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui9.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the choice and do +not forget when leaving to save definitively your configuration using the +menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you have changed +the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before saving them. </para> + <note><para>It is also possible to create or modify the rules by editing the +configuration file <filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf</filename>. + </para></note> + <caution><para>Changes in the <emphasis role="bold">Permission tab</emphasis> (or directly +in the configuration file) are taken into account at the first periodic +check (see the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role="bold">Periodic +checks tab</emphasis>). If you want them to be taken immediately into +account, use the msecperms command in a console with root rights. You can +use before, the msecperms -p command to know the permissions that will be +changed by msecperms.</para></caution> + <caution><para>Do not forget that if you modify the permissions in a console or in a file +manager, for a file where the box <guilabel>Enforce </guilabel> is checked +in the <emphasis role="bold">Permissions tab </emphasis>, msecgui will write +the old permissions back after a while, accordingly to the configuration of +the options CHECK_PERMS and CHECK_PERMS_ENFORCE in the <emphasis +role="bold">Periodic Checks tab </emphasis>.</para></caution> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/otherMageiaTools.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/otherMageiaTools.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b19a5689 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/otherMageiaTools.xml @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="otherMageiaTools"> + <info> + <title xml:id="otherMageiaTools-ti1">Other Mageia Tools</title> + </info> + + <para>There are more Mageia tools than those that can be started in the Mageia +Control Center. Click on a link below to learn more, or continue reading the +next pages.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakbug"/><emphasis>drakbug</emphasis> + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakbug_report"/><emphasis>drakbug_report </emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="lsnetdrake"/><emphasis>TO BE WRITTEN </emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="lspcidrake"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>And more tools?</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakbug.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakbug_report.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="lsnetdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="lspcidrake.xml"></xi:include> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/rpmdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/rpmdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..44cef8d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/rpmdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,251 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="rpmdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + <!--2012-09-03 marja expanded xml:id's of section and title below, because they conflicted with identical xml:id's in another page of MCC help, also replaced first para in some sections with title tags, removed figure tags--> +<info annotations="simonnzg 6jan2013"> + <title xml:id="rpmdrake-ti1">Software Management (Install and Remove Software)</title> + + <subtitle>rpmdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="rpmdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="rpmdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + + <section xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction"> + <title xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction-ti1">Introduction to rpmdrake</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">rpmdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote>, also known as drakrpm, is a +program for installing, uninstalling and updating packages. It is the +graphical user interface of URPMI. At each start up, it will check online +package lists (called 'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official +servers, and will show you each time the latest applications and packages +available for your computer. A filter system allows you to display only +certain types of packages: you may display only installed applications (by +default), or only available updates. You can also view only not installed +packages. You can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries +of descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names +included in the packages.</para> + + <para>To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with <xref +linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"/> .</para> + + <important> + <para>During the installation, the configured repository is the medium used for +the installation, generally the DVD or CD. If you keep this medium, rpmdrake +will ask it each time you want to install a package, with this pop-up window +: <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>If the above message annoys you +and you have a good internet connection without too strict download limit, +it is wise to remove that medium and replace it by online repositories +thanks to <xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"/> .</para> + + <para>Moreover, the online repositories are always up to date, contains much more +packages, and allow to update your installed packages.</para> + </important> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The main parts of the screen</title> + + <screenshot> +<mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></screenshot> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Package type filter:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This filter allows you to display only certain types of packages. The first +time you start the manager, it only displays applications with a graphical +interface. You can display either all the packages and all their +dependencies and libraries or only package groups such as applications only, +updates only or backported packages from newer versions of Mageia.</para> + + <warning> + <para>The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or Mageia, who +probably do not want command line or specialist tools. Since you're reading +this documentation, you're obviously interested in improving your knowledge +of Mageia, so it is best to set this filter to "All".</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><firstterm> <emphasis role="bold">Package state filter:</emphasis> +</firstterm></para> + + <para>This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only the +packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both installed and +not installed.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Search mode:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Click on this icon to search through the package names, through their +summaries, through their complete description or through the files included +in the packages.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">"Find" box:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than one keyword +for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for "mplayer" and +"xine" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Erase all:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in the "Find" box +.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Categories list:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear categories and +sub categories.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Description panel:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete +description. It displays many useful elements about the selected package. It +can also show precise details about the package, the files included in the +package as well as a list of the last changes made by the maintainer.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The status column</title> + + <para>Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software either by +category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using area 4. A +list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the chosen medium +is shown with different status markers according to whether each package is +installed/not installed/an update... To change this status, just check or +uncheck the box before the package name and click on +<guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2" align="left"> + <colspec align="center"/> + + <thead> + <row> + <entry align="center">圖示</entry> + + <entry valign="middle" align="center">Legend</entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package is already installed</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package will be installed</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package cannot be modified</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package is an update</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package will be uninstalled</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table></para> + + <para>Examples in the screenshot above:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed), the status +icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be uninstalled when clicking +on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status), the orange +with a down arrow status icon will appear and it will be installed when +clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The dependencies</title> + + <screenshot> +<mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></screenshot> + + <para>Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to work. They +are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake displays an +information window allowing you to choose whether to accept the selected +dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information (see above). It +may also happen that various packages are able to provide the needed +library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of alternatives with a +button to get more information and another button to choose which package to +install.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/scannerdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/scannerdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5ac9447f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/scannerdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,259 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="scannerdrake" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerdrake-ti1">設定掃描器</title> + <subtitle>scannerdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + + + <section xml:id="scannerinstallation"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerinstallation-ti1">安裝</title> + </info> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing +<emphasis>scannerdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to configure a +single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. It +also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a +remote computer or to access remote scanners.</para> + + <para>When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following +message:</para> + + <para><emphasis>"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?"</emphasis></para> + + <para>Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install +<code>scanner-gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet +installed.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see +the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance, +<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner +sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref +linkend="scannersharing"/>.</para> + + + <para>However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its +cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new +scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a +scanner manually</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the +list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis></para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake2.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im2"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click +<emphasis>Cancel</emphasis></para> + + <para>Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link +xlink:href="http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html">SANE: +Supported Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link +xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para> + </note> + +<figure xml:id="choosescannerport"> +<info> + <title xml:id="choosescannerport-ti1">Choose port</title> + </info> <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake3.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im3"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></figure> + + <para>You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available +ports</emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that +case, select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one.</para> + + <para>After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen +similar to the one below.</para> +<para>If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref +linkend="scannerextrasteps"/>.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake4.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section xml:id="scannersharing"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannersharing-ti2">Scannersharing</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake5.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im5"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be +accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also +decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on +this machine.</para> + + <para>Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or +deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on +this computer.</para> + + <para>Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted +from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake6.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im6"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake7.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im7"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote +machines.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake8.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im8"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>"All remote machines" are allowed to access the local scanner.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake9.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im9"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool +offers to do it.</para> + + <para>At the end, the tool will alter these files:</para> + + <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive +"net"</para> + + <para>It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and +<emphasis>xinetd</emphasis> to be started on boot.</para> + </section> + +<section xml:id="scannerspecifics"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerspecifics-ti2">Specifics</title> + </info> + + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Hewlett-Packard</para> + + <para>Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis> +(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow +you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device +Manager</emphasis>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Epson</para> + + <para>Drivers are available from <link +xlink:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this +page</link>. When indicated, you must install the +<emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then +<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the +<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a conflict +with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this warning can be +ignored.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + +</section> + +<section xml:id="scannerextrasteps"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerextrasteps-ti1">Extra installation steps</title> + </info> + + <para>It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref +linkend="choosescannerport"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra +steps to correctly configure your scanner.</para> + +<itemizedlist> + + <listitem> +<para>In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded +each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device, +after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the +firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you +downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor.</para><para> + When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at +each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient.</para> +</listitem> + + <listitem> +<para>Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the +<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/"name_of_your_SANE_backend".conf file.</emphasis> </para> + </listitem> + +<listitem> +<para>Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know +what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link +xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para> +</listitem> + +</itemizedlist> + + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/software-management.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/software-management.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ebf889ef --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/software-management.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" +xml:id="software-management"> + <info> + <title xml:id="software-management-ti1">軟體管理</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="software-management-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="software-management.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for software +management. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + <orderedlist><title>軟體管理</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="MageiaUpdate"></xref><emphasis> = Update your +system</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="mgaapplet-config"></xref></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media +sources for install and update</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="rpmdrake.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="MageiaUpdate.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="mgaapplet-config.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="drakrpm-edit-media.xml"></xi:include> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/system-config-printer.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/system-config-printer.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..841f4c4b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/system-config-printer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,341 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="system-config-printer"> + + + + + <info> + <!-- Language proof JohnR 2012/08/28 --> +<!-- 2012-09-03 marja: made the link to Complete the installation process work (I hope) + Lebarhon : added All in one devices in the chapter "Hewlett-Packard printers" 12/13--> +<title xml:id="system-config-printer-ti1">Install and configure a printer</title> + + <subtitle>system-config-printer</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="system-config-printer-im1" format="PNG" fileref="system-config-printer.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section xml:id="introduction"> + <title xml:id="introduction-ti1">前言</title> + + <para>Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own <link +ns2:title="CUPS" ns2:href="http://localhost:631">configuration +interface</link> which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia +offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer +which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu +and openSUSE.</para> + + <para>You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the +installation, because some drivers may only be available in this way.</para> + + <para>Printer installation is carried out in the <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> +section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select the <guilabel>Configure +printing and scanning</guilabel> tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing +<emphasis>system-config-printer</emphasis>. The root password will be asked +for.</para> + </footnote>.</para> + + <para>MCC will ask for the installation two packages:</para> + + <blockquote> + <para>task-printing-server</para> + + <para>task-printing-hp</para> + </blockquote> + + <para>It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB of +dependencies are needed.</para> + + <para>To add a printer, choose the "Add" printer button. The system will try to +detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot displays a +printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected, such as a +printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line. The window +will also attempt to configure a network printer.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="automatic"> + <title>Automatically detected printer</title> + + <para>This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds the +name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click +"Next". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be +automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known +drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in the +next paragraph. Continue with <xref linkend="terminate"/></para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="non_automatic"> + <title>No automatically detected printer</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="printer3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays a window +to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the following +options.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Select printer from database</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>provide PPD file</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>search for a driver to download</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer manufacturer +first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If more than one +driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless you have +encountered some problems with that one before, in this case select the one +which know to work.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="terminate"> + <title>Complete the installation process</title> + + <para>After the driver selection, a window requests some information which will +allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first line is +the name under which the device will appear in applications in the list of +available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test page. After +this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of available +printers.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="network_printer"> + <title>Network printer</title> + + <para>Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired or +wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are attached to +another workstation that serves as printserver.</para> + + <note> + <para>Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always associate a fixed +IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course that should be the same +as the IP address the printer of printserver is set to, if it has a fixed +one.</para> + </note> + + <para>The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or +printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a +configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a label +on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to a +Mageia system, you can run <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis> on it +as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and letters +after "HWaddr".</para> + + <para>You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to talk to +your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol to choose, +you can try the <guilabel>Network Printer</guilabel> - <guilabel>Find +Network Printer</guilabel> option in the <guilabel>Devices</guilabel> menu +and give the IP address of the printer in the box on the right, where it +says "host".</para> + + <para>If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose a +protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the +list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the list.</para> + + <para>Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver to find +which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue names.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="network_printing_protocols"> + <title>Network printing protocols</title> + + <para>One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known as +JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the network +via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the printer is +known on the network. This technique is also used inside some ADSL-routers +which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this case, the +IP-address is that of the router. Note that the tool "Hp Device manager" can +manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like +<emphasis>hp:/net/<name-of-the-printer></emphasis> . In this case, fixed +IP-adress is not required.</para> + + <para>Choose the option <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> as the +protocol and set the address in <guilabel>Host:</guilabel>, do not change +the <guilabel>Port Number</guilabel>, unless you know that it needs to be +changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver is +the same as above.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="printer5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The other protocols are:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipp)</emphasis>: a printer which can +be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for example a printer +connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may also be used also by +some ADSL-routers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (https): </emphasis>the same as ipp, +but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol. The port has to be +defined. By default, the port 631 is used.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): </emphasis>the same as ipp, but +with TLS secured protocol.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>LPD/LPR host or Printer</emphasis>: a printer which can be +accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example a printer +connected to a station using LPD.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Windows printer via SAMBA</emphasis>: a printer connected to a +station running Windows or a SMB server and shared.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to form +the URI:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Appsocket</para> + + <para><uri>socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port </uri></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)</para> + + <para><uri>ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri></para> + + <para><uri>http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol</para> + + <para><uri>lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue</uri></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>Additional information can be found in the <link +ns2:href="http://www.cups.org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html">CUPS +documentation.</link></para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="properties"> + <title>Device Properties</title> + + <para>You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access to +parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on your +system, but you can specify a different one with the +<guimenu>Server</guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Connect...</guimenuitem> menu, +another window which gives access to the tuning of other specific parameters +of the server, following <guimenu>Server</guimenu> | +<guimenuitem>Settings.</guimenuitem></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="troubleshoot">Troubleshoot</title> + + <para>You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by +inspecting <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename></para> + + <para>You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the +<guimenu>Help</guimenu> | <guilabel>Troubleshoot</guilabel> menu.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="specificities"> + <title>Specifics</title> + + <para>It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not available in +Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at the <link +ns2:href="http://openprinting.org/printers/">openprinting</link> site to +check if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if the package +is already present in Mageia and in this case install it manually. Then, +redo the installation process to configure the printer. In all cases, report +the problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are comfortable with this +tool and furnish the model and driver information and whether the printer +works or not after installation. Here are some sources to find other +up-to-date drivers or for more recent devices.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Brother printers</emphasis></para> + + <para><link +ns2:href="http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/en/download_prn.html">This +page</link> give a list of drivers provided by Brother. Search the driver +for your device, download the rpm(s) and install.</para> + + <para>You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration utility.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one +devices</emphasis></para> + + <para>These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically after the +detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other information +<link +ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html">here</link>. The +tool "HP Device Manager" is available in the <guilabel>System</guilabel> +menu. Also view <link +ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/install/manual/hp_setup.html">configuration</link> +for the management of the printer.</para> + + <para>A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the scanner +features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface doesn't +allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate). In this +case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save the +picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device. Afterwards, +open your favourite imaging software and load your picture from the memory +card which is appeared in the /media folder.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Samsung colour printer</emphasis></para> + + <para>For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, <link +ns2:href="http://foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/">this site provides drivers</link> for +the QPDL protocol.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Epson printers and scanners</emphasis></para> + + <para>Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link +ns2:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this +search page</link>. For the scanner part, you must install the "iscan-data" +package first, then "iscan" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also +be available and is to install. Choose the <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages +according to your architecture. </para> + + <para> It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a +conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Canon printers</emphasis></para> + + <para>For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named turboprint +<link ns2:href="http://www.turboprint.info/">available here </link>.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/transfugdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/transfugdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..64a2b32a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/transfugdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="transfugdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW"> + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Written by yurchor 2013-07-03 --> +<!-- Tproof --> +<!-- --> +<title xml:id="transfugdrake-ti1">匯入 Windows® 文件與設定</title> + + <subtitle>transfugdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="transfugdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="transfugdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">transfugdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the <emphasis +role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled +<guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel></para> + + <para>The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings +from a <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark> +installation on the same computer as the Mageia installation.</para> + + <warning> + <para>Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake +immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </warning> + + <para>After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some +explanation about the tool and import options.</para> + + <para>As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of +<trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> installation.</para> + + <para>When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to +choose accounts in <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> and +Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account +than yours own.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of +transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> +user account names with special symbols can be displayed incorrectly.</para> + </note> + + <note> + <para>Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders.</para> + </note> + + <warning> + <para>Some <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> applications +(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For +example, NVidia drivers in <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark>are updated using +<emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not use such accounts for the +import purposes.</para> + </warning> + + <para>When you finished with the accounts selection press +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method +to import documents:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark> data from <emphasis>My +Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</emphasis> and <emphasis>My +Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to skip import by selecting the +appropriate item in this window.</para> + + <para>When you finished with the document import method choosing press +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method +to import bookmarks:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and +<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia +<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance.</para> + + <para>Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> +button.</para> + + + + <!-- Does not work as expected, might be due to incompatible version of OE + <para> +With transfugdrake, it is possible to import <emphasis>Outlook Express</emphasis> settings and mail archives into <emphasis>Evolution</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>When you finished with the mail import method choosing press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import mail:</para> +--> +<para>The next page allows you to import desktop background:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> +button.</para> + + <para>The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the +<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/userdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/userdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..40b850c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/zh_TW/userdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="zh_TW" xml:id="userdrake"> + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-27 --> +<!-- Tproof --> +<!-- Preliminary lproof JohnR 2012-08-30 --> +<!-- --> +<title xml:id="userdrake-ti1">使用者與群組</title> + + <subtitle>userdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="userdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="userdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">userdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the <emphasis +role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled +"Manage users on system"</para> + + <para>The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this +means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings +(ID, shell, ...)</para> + + <para>When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in +the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the +<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way.</para> + + <para><guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton></para> + + <para>This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="userdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The field <emphasis role="bold">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the +entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything +or nothing as well!</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Login</emphasis> is the only required field.</para> + + <para>Setting a <emphasis role="bold">Password</emphasis> is highly +recommended. There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the +password is weak, too short or is too similar to the login name. You should +use figures, lower and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The +shield will turn orange and then green as the password strength improves.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure +you entered what you intended to.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that allows +you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options are +Bash, Dash and Sh.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if +checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new +user as the only member (this may be edited).</para> + + <para>The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately +after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">2 Add Group</emphasis></para> + + <para>You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific +group ID.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)</para> + + <para><guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given +for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed).</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Account Info</emphasis>:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="userdrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account. +Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary +accounts.</para> + + <para>The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long +as the account is locked.</para> + + <para>It is also possible to change the icon.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an +expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his +password periodically.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="userdrake3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups that +the user is a member of.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be +effective until his/her next login.</para> + </note> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the group +name.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the users +who are members of the group</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">5 Delete</emphasis></para> + + <para>Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis +role="bold">Delete</emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to +ask if home directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group +has been created for the user, it will be deleted as well.</para> + + <warning> + <para>It is possible to delete a group which is not empty.</para> + </warning> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">6 Refresh</emphasis></para> + + <para>The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to +refresh the display.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">7 Guest Account</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is intended +to give somebody temporary access to the system with total security. Login +is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to make modifications +to the system from this account. The personal directories are deleted at the +end of the session. This account is enabled by default, to disable it, click +in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest account</guimenu>.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file |